ML20137J625: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(StriderTol Bot insert)
 
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 1: Line 1:
#REDIRECT [[IR 05000458/1997001]]
{{Adams
| number = ML20137J625
| issue date = 04/01/1997
| title = Insp Rept 50-458/97-01 on 970127-0214.No Violations Noted. Major Areas Inspected:Operations & Engineering
| author name =
| author affiliation = NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION IV)
| addressee name =
| addressee affiliation =
| docket = 05000458
| license number =
| contact person =
| document report number = 50-458-97-01, 50-458-97-1, NUDOCS 9704040080
| package number = ML20137J576
| document type = INSPECTION REPORT, NRC-GENERATED, TEXT-INSPECTION & AUDIT & I&E CIRCULARS
| page count = 126
}}
See also: [[see also::IR 05000458/1997001]]
 
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:_ - . .    ._        _ .. . .-_
,
                                          ENCLOSURE 1                              1
                                                                                    1
'
                        U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION
                                                                                    i
<
                                            REGION IV
    Docket No.:      50-458
    License No.:      NPF-47
    Report No.:      50-458/97-01
)    Licensee:        Entergy Operations, Inc.
    Facility:        River Bend Station                                          1
                                                                                    l
    Location:        5485 U.S. Highway 61                                        .
                      St. Francisville, Louisiana                                  j
    Dates:            January 27 through February 14,1997
    Inspector:        T. O. McKernon, Chief Examiner
    Approved By:      J. L. Pellet, Chief, Operations Branch                      '
                      Division of Reactor Safety
      ATTACHMENTS:
      Attachment 1:  Supplemental Information
      Attachment 2:  Simulation Facility Report
      Attachment 3:  Facility Post Examination Comments and NRC Review
      Attachment 4:  Final Written Examination and Answer Key
                                                                                    I
                                                                                    i
                                                                                    ,
  9704040000 970401                                                                i
  PDR    ADOCK 05000458
  G                PDR
                                                                                    l
 
    -- - _ . - . - . - . _ - . -                            - - _ -      - _ - - - - - - - . . . . -                  - . . - ._ -
                                                                                                                                  :
                                                                                                                                  !
                                                                                      -2-
                                                                                                                                  ;
                                                                    EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
                                                                        River Bend Station
                                                          NRC Inspection Report 50-458/97-01
                                                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                                                  !
                            This inspection evaluated the competency of a senior operator license applicant for                  '
                            issuance of an operating license at the River Bend Station facility. -The initial license
                            examination was developed by the facility using the pilot process program guidance                    !
                            contained in Generic Letter 95-06 and NUREG-1021, Revision 7 and Supplement 1, .                      !
                              " Operating Licensing Examiners Standards." An NRC examiner reviewed, approved, and                  I
                              administered the examination. The initial written examination was administered to the
                            applicant on January 27,1997 by both facility and NRC proctors. The operating test was
                              administered on January 31,1997 and March 12,1997. The senior operator applicant                    ;
                                                                                                                                  '
                            displayed the requisite knowledge and skills to satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 55 and
                            was issued the appropriate license,                                                                  j
                                                                                                                                  l
                              Ooerations
                              *      The draft examination outlines as submitted were not adequate for administration.            -
                                    The operating test control room systems proposed were of narrower scope than                  t
                                    allowed by NUREG-1021 (Section 05.1.1).
                                                                                                                                  !
                              *      Two potential examination compromises occurred, which were contrary to
                                    examination security practices agreed to by licensee staff (Section 05.1.2).
                              *      The applicant passed all portions of the initiallicense examination which satisfied          i
                                    the requirements of 10 CFR 55.33(a)(2), and was issued the appropriate license in
                                    accordance with 10 CFR 55.51. However, the applicant performed marginally on
                                    the written examination (Sections 04.1,04.2).
                              *      The licensed operator requalification program performance was reviewed to
                                    ascertain operator performance. The licensee's licensed operators performed
                                    acceptably during recent licensed operator training cycle examinations
                                    (Section 05.3).
1
L                            *      The licensee's written examination prereview was not of sufficient quality as
'
                                    evidenced by over 5 percent of the written examination being identified for change            .
                                                                                                                                  '
,-
                                    in the postexamination review (Section 05.1.2).
,
                              Enaineerina
}
                              *    The Updated Final Safety Analysis Report wording was inconsistent with that of the
!                                    Improved Technical Specification and the observed plant practices related to
                                      qualification requirements for licensed senior operators (Section E2.1).
L
l_.                                        _    _  ___            _ __                            _ _ , .      _ _
 
  __ _        .-      _.          _- ..      -        _- . - .            .                    .
                                                                                                    I
                                                                                                    !
                                                      -3-                                          ]
                                                Report Details
        Summary of Plant Status
              The unit remained at 100 percent power during the inspection period. No
              significant plant challenges to the operating crew were experienced.                  l
                                                                                                    l
                                                  I. Operations                                      i
        04    Operator Knowledge and Performance
        04.1 Initial Written Examination
          a.  Inspection Scope
              The written examination was co-administered by the licensee training representative
              and the NRC examiner onsite on January 27,1997, in accordance with guidance
              provided by the chief examiner. This action was taken because of a potential
              compromise of examination securits/ which occurred the week prior to the written
              examination week. The NRC examiner graded the written examination and the
              licensee staff performed a postexamination analysis. As a result of the licensee's
              post examination analysis, postexamination comments were submitted to the NRC
              on March 3,1997.
          b.  Observations and Findinas
              The applicant passed the written examination with a score of 80.4 percent. After
              final NRC review it was determined that the applicant missed 19 out of 97            l
              questions. The missed questions were reviewed by both the licensee and the NRC        '
,
              to ascertain whether a generic weakness or training deficiency existed. No specific
l              generic weakness was identified. However, the postexamination review determined
              that the applicant demonstrated a potentially weak overall system knowledge in that  i
              questions related to detailed systems knowledge were typically missed. As such,      !
              the applicant performed marginally on the examination.
,
                                                                                                    l
'
          c.    Conclusions
                The applicant passed the written examination portion of the license evaluation.
                Evaluation of the applicant's performance indicated a potential weakness in the
                depth of the applicants overall system knowledge,                                    i
                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                    l
$
1
I
 
                                                                              __
                                              -4-
04.2 Initial Ooeratina Test
  a.  Inspection Scoce
      The NRC examiner administered the various portions of the operating test to the      !
      applicant on January 31 and February 12,1997. The applicant participated in two
      dynamic simulator scenarios; one while acting as the reactor operator at-the-        1
      controls and acting as the control room supervisor in the second. The applicant      ]
      also received a walkthrcugh test which consisted of ten system and four              ]
      administrative area tasks and questions.                                            I
  b.  Observations and Findinas
                                                                                            l
      During the simulator portion of the examination, communications practices observed
      in the simulator were good. Operator performance in the simulator was also good.
      The applicant passed this portion of the examination and demonstrated good
      command and control skills.
      During the job performance measure portion of the examination, the applicant
      demonstrated good plant knowledge and a familiarity in locating components,          !
      support items, and reference material. The administrative portion of the            I
                                                                                            I
      examination was also administered during the plant walkthroughs. The applicant
      demonstrated a high degree of familiarity with the plant's administrative functions
      and requirements. The applicant passed these portions of the examination.
  c.  Conclusion
      The applicant passed the operating test portion of the examination. Good
      communication skills as well as command and control skills were observed. The
        applicant demonstrated a high degree of familiarity with plant procedures and in
        locating components in the plant.
05      Operator Training and Qualification
05.1 initial Licensina Examination Development
        The facility licensee developed the initiallicensing examination in accordance with
        guidance provided in Generic Letter 95-06, " Changes in the Operator Licensing
        Program."
05.1.1 Examination Outline
  a.    Scoce
        The licensee submitted the initial examination outlines on November 21 and
        December 10,1996. The chief examiner reviewed the submittats against the
 
  _ _ -                    -.        .    _        _    __ _ __    _ _ _            _    _ _ _ . - _
                                                                                                        l
                                                      .5
              requirements of NUREG-1021, " Licensed Operator Examiner Standards" Revision 7,          !
              Supplement 1, and NUREG/BR-0122, " Examiner's Handbook for Developing
              Operator Licensing Written Examinations." Revision 5.
          b.  Observations and Findinos
              The chief examiner determined that the initial examination outlines generally
              satisfied the above requirements. However, minor changes to the written                  l
              examination outline were made by revising a knowledge / ability designator. The
              chief examiner also noted that the job performance measures outline did not meet
              the requirements of Examiner Standard 201-3, item 3b, in that safety functions for
              Job Performance Measures 4 and 8 were repeated which resulted in the job
              performance measures not covering at least seven different safety functions. Other
              observations by the examiner were minor. The comments on the outlines were
              discussed with the licensee author and revisions were made and submitted along
              with the draft initial examination.
          c.  Conclusion
              The draft examination outlines as submitted were not adequate for administration
              The operating test controt room systems proposed were of narrower scope than              ;
              allowed by NUREG-1021.                                                                    ;
                                                                                                        i
        05.1.2 Examination Packaae
          a.  Inspection Scope
              The licensee submitted the completed draft examination package between
                December 10,1996 and January 6,1997. The chief examiner reviewed the
                submittal against the requirements of NUREG-1021, " Licensed Operator Examiner
                Standards" Revision 7, Supplement 1 and NUREG/BR-0122, " Examiner's Handbook
                for Developing Operator Licensing Written Examinations," Revision 5.
          b.    Observations and Findinas
l
                The draft written examination was transmitted by the licensee to the NRC in a letter
l
                dated December 10,1996. The draft written examination was considered properly
l
                discriminating. It was responsive to a knowledge and abilities sample plan
l              submitted by a letter dated November 21,1996, which was approved by the chief
l              examiner. The chief examiner approved the draft examination based upon a review
i
'
                of reference material provided with each question. Few substantive comments
                were made with most comments of an editorial nature. The written examination
-
                was considered adequate as submitted. In response to chief examiner comments,
                the licensee enhanced questions 35,43,55,56,62,69,70,76,77,78,81,88,
                90, 94, and 97.
i
l
 
                . _ . _          -                .-      . - . .
                                          6-
Additionally, due to a potential examination compromise, other questions were
replaced. The compromise occurred when a licensed operator, with examination
content knowledge and on the security agreement, interacted with the applicant to
complete systems qualification the week before the examination. The control room
supervisor who was also on the examination security agreement observed the
operator and applicant and halted the activity in progress. The licensee initiated a
condition report, conducted investigations and evaluated the draft examination for
possible overlap with the system qualification job task evaluations. As a result, the  i
licensee replaced questions 19 and 33 on the written examination. There was no
indication of an actual compromise to the examination.
The licensee provided postexamination comments on seven written questions which
are attached to this report (Attachment 3). Review of the licensee's submitted post
examination comments resulted in accepting licensee recommendations in deleting
three questions (34,41, 59); a change in the correct answer to one question (15);
and the acceptance of two correct answers for another question (46). The review
also determined that the licensee's recommendations for questions 80 and 89 were
not valid and the questions were retained. Additionally, the NRC reviewed other
questions and determined that question 27 had two possible correct answers. As a
result, after incorporating these changes, the applicant received a score of 78 out of
97, equivalent to 80.4 percent. The as-given written examination and answer key
are attached to this report (Attachment 4).
Because postexamination reviews identified changes based on technical accuracy of
over 5 percent of the written examination, the licensee was asked to explain why
their staff had failed to identify these issues before the examination administration
and to describe corrective actions planned to assure that the next licensed operator
written examination is of higher quality.                                              1
The licensee submitted three dynamic scenarios, including one backup scenario
which was not used during the examination. The chief examiner had few
comments related to the proposed scenarios. Some general comments related to
statements for operator actions being explicit were made. The second scenario did
not meet the criteria of Examiner Standard 604-1 for contingency actions after
emergency operator performance entry. Other minor spelling errors were also
noted. The licensee reviewed the comments and made the necessary revisions prior
to onsite validation the week of January 27,1997.
During the week of January 27,1997, a second potential examination compromise
occurred when a licensed operator involved in simulator scenario validation
inadvertently left some rough notes related to the first scenario in the simulator,  j
The notes were disenvered immediately afterward by the requalification crew          i
entering the simu;ator er requalifi:ation training. The licensee took prompt actions
to enter the requalification New c 1 the security agreement, brief all individuals on
the security agreement about . ,ncident and the need for continued vigilance since
the examination was postponed. Wnile the second incident was unrelated, the two
                                                                                      i
                                                                                      1
 
    . . _ _ _          _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _                    __._.._m..___..m___                            .
.                                                                                                                >
'
                                                                                                                  i
I                                                                                                                  i
).                                                                                                              'I
,                                                                                                                ,
,                                                        -7-                                                    l
I
1
                                                                                                                  I
l'                  events caused the licensee staff to reevaluate the adequacy of their security                  l
1
                    measures and to take both short and long-term corrective actions. The licensee
[                  replaced the entire set of simulator scenarios, including the backup scenario, to
]                  ensure that no overlap existed with the potentially compromised scenario. The
j                  dynamic simulator portion of the examination was postponed until the week of
l                  February 10,1997.
i
!                  The chief examiner validated the replacement scenarios during the week of
l                  February 10,1997. The examiner verified that the replacement scenarios contained
j                  no overlap with any of the removed scenarios. The examiner also noted that the
,                  replacement scenarios required modification before administering to ensure the
i                  examiner standard guidances were fully met with regard to Examiner Standard 301-
;                  5, " Transient and Event Checklist."
1
l                  The licensee also submitted both job performance measures and questions to cover
]                  the administrative section of the walkthrough test. The chief examiner reviewed the
i                  job performance measures and noted a number of comments which were discussed
j                  informally with the licensee examination author. Most of the comments related to
i                  the adequacy of the followup questions (e.g., multipart answers required, whether
)                  question is open or closed reference). Some other com_ments resulted in the job
4                  performance measure being replaced. For example, job performance measure
:                  " Manually Startup Standby Gas Treatment Train A taking a suction on Outside Air"
I                  was considered too simplistic in that the entire jo'o task only had two active steps
!                  performed by the applicant. In another instance, a job performance measure had
'
                    potential overlap with an event in one of the scenarios. The licensee was very                i
                    responsive in reviewing the comments and making the necessary revisions.                      l
e
l              c.  Conclusions
t
i
*
                    Overall, the written examination and operating test materials submitted were of fair
;                  quality and discriminated at the appropriate license level. However, because of NRC
,
                    comments on the initial draft examinations and potential security compromises, a
4                    number of revisions and revalidations prior to examination administration were
;                    required. Additionally, because the licensee submitted over 5 percent of the written
:                    examination for postexamination comment, the licensee's written examination
                    prereview was not of sufficient quality.
              05.2 Simulation Facility Performance
J
.
                a.  Insoection Scope
:
i
}                    The examiner observed simulator performance with regard to fidelity during the
<
                    examination validation and administration.
:
  4
I
i
:
,
                                          , -                                                          ,
                                                                                        ,                e--
 
                                                                                ~
                                                  8
,
    b.  Observations and Findinas
          It was observed that the simulator performed well during both the initiallicense
          examination validation and administration and during licensed operator
          requalification training conducted during the inspection period. Simulator fidelity
;        issues were not observed during the examination and are reflected in Attachment 2.
                                                                                                j
    c.  Conclusions                                                                          1
'
          The simulator supported the examination well. No simulator fidelity issues were
,        observed.
  05.3 Licensed Operator Reaualification Procram Status (IP 71001)
    a.  Scope
*
          This portion of the inspection reviewed results from the past two licensed operator  j
          requalification training cycle examinations and conducted discussions with key        i
          operations training managers,
    b.  Observations and Findinas
                                                                                                i
;        The inspector noted that no operating crew failures occurred during the
.        September 2 through October 11,1997, requalification training cycle. Further,
          during the annual requalification examinations conducted between October 14 and
          December 13,1996, one crew out of nine failed the examination. It was noted that
          the crew failure during the annual examination was not one of the same two
          operating crews which had difficulty in the simulator during the past August 1996
          cycle training. Additionally, the inspector discussed requalification training status
          with a key training manager and was informed that crews were taking greater
a
          ownership responsibility for their training to include better feedback and self-
;        critiques of their simulator sessions.
*
    c.  Conclusion
          The inspector concluded that operator performance based upon recent
4
          requalification cycle training and the annual requalification examination had been
,
          acceptable.
4
$
 
                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                      j
                                                                                                      iI
                                                                                                      :
                                                                                                        I
                                                        9
                                                                                                      .
                                                111. Enaineerina                                      '
    E2        Engineering Support of Facilities & Equipment                                          j
    E2.1      Review of the Uodated Final Safety Analysis Reoort Commitments                          !
              A recent discovery of a licensee operating their facility in a manner contrary to the
              Updated Final Safety Analysis Report description highlighted the need for a special    ;
              focused review that compares plant practices, procedures, and/or parameters to the      l
              Updated Final Safety Analysis Report descriptions. While preparing for the              l
              inspection discussed in this report, the inspector and the licensee reviewed the        I
              applicable portions of the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report that related to the    !
              areas inspected. The inspector noted that the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report      )
              training commitment was inconsistent with the observed plant practices,                  ;
              procedures, and/or parameters in that commitments stated in the licensee's              l
              Technical Specification. Specifically, Section TR 5.3, " Licensed Operator
              qualifications," of the Technical Specifications committed to the minimum
              qualifications of the supplemental requirements of NRC letter dated March 28,
                1980. The Updated Safety Analysis Report, Section 13.2.1 commits individual            I
              training programs to comply with Regulatory Guide 1.8 and ANSI /ANS 3.1-1978.            l
              The licensee has implemented a systems approach to training program in
              accordance with Generic Letter 87-07. Further, the licensee's
              Procedure TPP-7-009, " Hot License Operator Training and Qualification Program," is
              designed to meet the requirements of ANS-3.1-1981 and Regulatory Guide 1.8.
              The licensee committed to revise the Final Updated Safety Analysis Report and
              Tc, L dcal Specification to reflect their current training program commitments and
              reve.nents.
                                          V. Manaaement Meetinas
    X1        Exit Meeting Summary
              The examiner presented the inspection results to members of the licensee
              management at the conclusion of the inspection on February 13,1997. The
              licensee acknowledged the findings presented.
              The licensee did not identify as proprietary any information or materials examined
              during the inspection,                                                                  j
                in addition, the licensee was informed by telephone on March 27,1997, that a 30        l
                day response request related to the quality of the licensee's written examination      l
                prereview would be included in the inspection report cover letter.                    {
                                                                                                        !
                                                                                                        I
                                                                                                  -  -
%. -
      ,  r , ,              , . , - -    ,    ,                    --    -  . --
 
                                                          _.    _ _ _
,
                                          ATTACHMENT 1
                                                                      i
                                    Supplemental Information
1
                              PARTIAL LIST OF PERSONS CONTACTED        '
                                                                      l
i
  Licensee
  D. Burnett, Senior Chemist
  M. Chilson, Licensing Specialist                                    I
  G. Davant, Licensing, Senior Staff
  D. Dietzel, Initial Licensed Operator Training Representative
,  T. Gates, Plant Engineering Supervisor                              i
*
  T. Hildebrandt, Outage Manager
                                                                      l
  R. King, Director, Nuclear Safety and Regulatory Affair-s          j
  D. Lorfing, Licensing Supervisor                                    1
  J. McGaha, Executive Vice President                                I
  J. McGhee, Operations Technical Assist
                                                                      '
  W. O'Malley, Operations Manager                                    l
1
  A. Shahkarami, Engineering Manager
  W. Stacey, Business Services Manager
  C. Sutherland, Training Supervisor
  W. Trudell, Operations Training Supervisor                          ,
  M. Wagner, Supervisor, Initial Licensed Operator Training          l
  L. Woods, Operations Supervisor
  G. Zinke, Quality Assurance Manager
l  NRC                                                                ;
,
  W. Smith, Senior Resident inspector
                                                                      i
                                                                      ;
a
 
                                                                                              !
                                          ATTACHMENT 2
                                  SIMULATION FACILITY REPORT
4
    Facility Licensee: River Bend Station
    Facility Docket: 50-458
.
l  Operating Examinations Administered at: RBS Training Center, St. Francisville, LA
    Operating Examinations Administered on: January 31 through Febre y 14,1997
    These observations do not constitute audit or inspection findings and are not, without    l
    further verification and review, indicative of noncompliance with 10 CFR 55.45(b). These  '
    observations do not affect NRC certification or approval of the simulation facility, other
,  than to provide information which may be used in future evaluations. No licensee action is
    required in response to these observations.
"
    NONE
                                                                                              l
.
  %
 
  .,a - >  4+    2  ,                                +~
                                                                              l
                                                                              I
                                                                              1
i
                                                                              ,
,
                                      ATTACHMENT 3
          FACILITY POST EXAMINATION COMMENTS AND NRC POST EXAMINATION REVIEW
                                                                              s
,
4
4
$
i
3
:
i.
N
4
4
                                                                              ,
a
>
!                                                                              !
J                                                                              l
1.                                                                            ,
4
 
  .. - - . . _ _                    .  - - -            ~ . - - - . - - - -        .. ...- - -- - - .
;
.
1-
-
1
,                                                      -2-
1
;
l
.                                    NRC Post-Examination Comment Review
                                                .
                                                                                                            1
d.
        Question #15; NRC disagrees. Accept only answer (c). The Normal Service Water System                j
I
        is a nonsafety related system. The only TS surveillances which affect the system are            -l
l        containment isolation valve testing, IST pumps and valves program, and system radiation
                                                                                                            {
j        monitor functional testing. Therefore based upon the information provided in the stem only        -
j        answer (c) is applicable.
                                                                                                            !
;        Question #27; NRC post examination review. Accept either answer (a) or (b). Stem does
j.      not specify location of operator or the type of operator.
        Question #34; NRC agrees. Delete question, insufficient information provided in stem of
4      question to indicate whether signal is sealed in or just spurious. This question was
:        specifically identified during the prereview process, reviewed by the licensee and accepted
,      in the as-administered format.
;
j      , Question #41; NRC agrees, delete question.
4
        Question #46; NRC agrees, accept either answer (a) or (b).
t
;      Question #59; NRC agrees, delete question.
;        Question #80; NRC disagrees. Keep as is. The question discriminates whether or not the
!        applicant knows that with a loss of the "A" RPS Bus, the condenser air removal pumps are
,
        lost. As a result, main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease. The selection of (d) as
j        an answer requires presumption that other leaks occur. While instrument air pressure will
        decrease in time, the plant response is protracted; the decrease in condenser vacuum
;        begins almost immediately. Therefore, answer (b) is the most plausible answer based upon          )
:      the conditions provided in the stem of the question.                                                !
                                                                                                            ;
        Question #89; NRC disagrees. Keep as is. The question does not require the applicant to
;      . know the test criteria, but does require the applicant to understand where to look in order        I
;        to call the rod "sdow" or " inoperable". This question was accepted during the licensee's
i        prereview process. Further, the training learning objective requires the student to identify
}        the TS operability requirements for the CRD Hydraulic and CRD Mechanism systems.
!
:
4
;
4
J
;
1
i
!
-
                          -.
 
                                  . . , -                        ~-                ~              ~                              . . . . .    . . . . ~ .        .-.
                                                                                                                                                                      -
I                                                                                                                                                                          I
#
                                                                                                                                            Entergy operations. Inc.      '
                                                                                                                                            Awi Berd Sinon
                                                                                                                                            M% U S H,qtmay 61
                                                                                                                                              o Bo                        i
;
-
  ~-
    Entergy                                                                                                                                'un,220u-
                                                                                                                                            Far 5013814872
        _ . . _ . . _ . _ _ . . .              _ . - . _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . - _ _ _ . _ _ _ . . _ _ _ . _ . . _ . _ _ ~ _ _ _ . _ _ _
                                                                                                                                                                          -
                                                                                                                                                                          ;
                                                                                                                                                                          '
                                                                                                                                            John R. McGaha. Jr.
                                                                                                                                                . n. m                    ,
                                                                                                                                            %v t,c e
!                                                                                                                                                                          -
                                                                                                                                                                          .
                                                                                                                                                                            '
i
,
        March 3,1997
i
,    . Regional Administrator                                                                                  ,
        U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
#
        Region IV
        611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400                                                                                                                                  i,
        Arlington, TX 76011
        Subject:                          River Bend Station Submittal of Formal NRC Examination Comments
                                          River Bend Station - Unit 1                                                                                                    -
                                          Docket No. 50-458
                                                                                                                                                                          4
        File No.:                          G9.5, Gl.41.26
        RBF1-97-0075
        RBG-43761
        RBEXEC-97-030
        Ladies and Gentlemen:
        In accordance with NUREG-1021, Revision 7, Supplement 1 (ES-402, Attaclunent 3),
        enclosed are comments on seven examination questions for your review and consideration.
        The enclosed comments and supporting documentation are provided as a result of the
        examination conducted at River Bend Station the week of January 27,1997 and February 10,
        1997. The chief examiner during the examination was Mr. Thomas McKernon.-
        If you have any questions, please contact Mr. Dave Dietzel at (504) 381-4246 or Mr. David G.
        Looney at (504) 381-3630.
        Sincerely,
      '
    hsohn
        Vice President
                                McGaha, Jr.
                                                                      f.
        Operations
        JRM/kvm
        enclosure
 
    River Bend Station Submittal of Formal NRC Examination Comments
    March 3,1997
    RBF1-97-0075
    RBG-43761
    RBEXEC-97-030
    Page 2 of 2
    cc:          U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                Document Control Desk
                Mail Stop PI-37
                Washington, DC 20555
                NRC Sr. Resident Inspector
                P. O. Box 1050
                St. Francisville, LA 70775
                David Wigginton
                NRR Project Manager
                U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                MS OWFN 13-H-3
                Washington, DC 20555
                Mr. Thomas McKernon
                U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                Region IV
                611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400
                Arlington, TX 76011
                Mr. Jchn L. Pellet
                Chief, Operator Licensing Branch
                U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                Region IV
                611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400
                Arlington, TX 76011
i
  -    -    -
 
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -              .      --_
                    Question 15                                                                                            Key Answer / Comments                                                                Recommendations
                .
                    During performance of flow balance surveillance testing on                                            Answer:        d                                                                      Accept both answers (c)
                    the Normal Service Water System, several valves that are                                                                                                                                    and (d).
                    normally full open need to be throttled for the duration of
                    the test.                                                                                              Reference:
                    Which of the following describes how the change in status                                              ADM-0015
                    of these valve will be tracked?                                                                        ADM-0022
                            a.  The throttle valve computerized listing will be                                          Comments:
                                updated and a Change Notice (CN) for the valve
                                realignment will be completed for SOP-0018,                                              Response (c) could also be correct.
                                " Normal Service Water".
                                                                                                                          c.    is correct for non Tech. Spec. testing
                            b. A Procedure Revision for the valve realignment                                                  activities (ADM-0022).
                                will be completed for SOP-0018," Normal                                                  d.    is correct for Tech. Spec. testing activities
                                Service Water" and an entry made in the Control                                                (ADM-0015).                                                                                                  !
                                Room log.
                            c.  The repositioning of the valves will be
                                documented per the guidance in ADM-0022,
                                " Conduct of Operations"
                            d. The repositioning of the valves will be controlled
                                by tracking all manipulations as required in the
                                sun eillance test package.                                                                                                                              .
                                                                                                                                                                                  (continued next page)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              l
                                            _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ - - - - - - _ - _ _ - _ _ . - - _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _                  . _ _ _ _ _- _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ -                    _ _ _ _ _  ___    --  _ _ _ _ _ _-. --
 
              . - _ _ _ _ _ _                                                                          _                        . _ _ - _ _ _                                  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _
  Question 15                Comments                                                                                          Recommendations !
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    $
l
                              The use of the term " Normal Service Water" implies the
                              manipulation of Non Safety-Related components which
                              could be documented per ADM-0022," Conduct of
                              Operations." The use of the term " surveillance testing"
                              implies the manipulation of Safety-Related components
                              during surveillance testing which are documented per
                              ADM-0015," Surveillance Testing." Given the disparity
                              in the stem of the question, ADM-0015 is no longer the
                              ONLY reference to govern this unusual operation.
                              ADM-0022," Conduct of Operations" provides guidance
                              for operational activities and therefore becomes an
                              expected response.
                              .  ADM-0022, Section 6.3 " System Check Lists," could
                                  provide guidance,
                                  " . system checklists are used for establishing and
                                  confirming the status of equipment and systems.
                                  proper system configuration is assured and
                                  maintained by use of administrative controls
                                  (i.e., SOP, MDL, OSP-0014, Temp. Alt.) "
                              .  ADM-0015, Step 7.11.5 would provide guidance for
                                  repositioning valves required to be manipulated as
                                  part of the surveillance test package.
                                T_______._-__________
                                  -                      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _                _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 
          6.2.2.  Routine procedural actions that are frequently perfonned may
                  not necessitate the use of a procedure. If there is any doubt as
                  to the procedural action by the individual performing the job,
                  the procedure must be in hand.
          6.2.3.  Entry conditions of emergency procedures shall be committed
                  to memory by licensed personnel.
          6.2.4.  The red diagonal lines on selected annunciator windows, in the
                  Control Room, are installed as a visual aid. These red
                  diagonal lines denote annunciators requiring review of the
                  EOP's for possible.cntry conditions.
          6.2.5.  If an evolution is suspended for an extended period of time,
                  reverification of the initial conditions is required as
                  determined by the OSS/CRS.
          6.2.6.  In the event that an original procedure checklist, STP or
                  tagging order becomes contammated the information should
                  be transferred to a clean copy of the document. This should be
                  noted at the top of the document along with the name of the
                  individual who is transferring the data.
----+ 6.3 System Check Lists (Ref. 2.54)
                                              NOTE
                During Refueling Outages all safety-related valve lineups
                shallbeperformed (Ref 2.44)
          6.3.1.    System checklists are used for establishing and confirming the
                    status of equipment and systems. System checklists'are
                    performed as a prerequisite for system operation and
                    periodically for equipment status verification.
                    1.  Following performance of system checklists, proper
                        system configuration is assured and maintained by use of
                        administrative controls. (i.e., SOP, MDL, OSP-0014,
                        Temp Alt.)
  ,,.
                      ADM-0022          REV - 19          PAGE 40 OF 53
 
                                                                                    i
6  PLANT OPERATING PROCEDURES                                                        j
  6.1  Procedure Compliance
                                                                                    1
        6.1.1.    Plant equipment shall be operated in accordance with current
                  written approved procedures.
        6.1.2.    If the individual actually performing the activity cannot or
                  believes he should not follow the procedure governing that
                  activity as written, he shall place the system / component into a
                  stable and safe condition and inform the responsible
                  supervisor. The s'ukervisor shall resolve the discrepancy in the
                  procedure by either:
                    1.  Determining the methods by which the activity can be
                        performed using the procedure as written and conveying
                        this to the individual performing the activity, or
                  2.    Submitting a procedure change, either temporary or
                        permanent depending on the actual situation. No funher
                        procedural steps shall be accomplished until the procedure
                        change is approved in accordance with RBNP-001.
        6.1.3.    In the event of an emergency not covered by an approved
                    procedure, operators shall take action so as to minimize
                    personnel injury, damage to the facility, and to protect the
                    health and safety of the public. Such deviations to procedures
                    shall be approved by the OSS/CRS prior to action or
                    deviation.
          6.1.4.    No interlock will be bypassed or defeated from performing its
                    function unless it is accomplished in accordance with an
                    approved procedure or work request.
    6.2  Procedure imp'ementation
          6.2.1.    Procedures that control operations where reliance on memory
                    cannot be trusted and where operations must be performed in a
                      specified sequence shall be followed step-by-step with the
                      procedure in hand. Many procedures will also require
                      signoffs, while others may need to be referred to only
                      occasionally.
>
                        ADM-0022          REV - 19        PAGE 39 OF 53
      -
 
            - - - - . - - - -                            .      -                . _ _  - . _ . ,    . . - .  - .
                                                                                                                        >
t  ,
                                        TITLE:
)
        =                  nterW                              STATION SURVFITLANCE TEST PROGRAM
-l                  Operations.
        River Bend Station
.
                                                5.    Include data tables within the procedure to record                i
                                                      As-Found and As-Left Data. When it is better to
                                                      locate the data tables in one location, append the
i                                                    consolidated data sheets as Attachment pages to the
2                                                    end of the surveillance procedure.
                                                      * The acceptance criteria or tolerances in the tables
                                                          should be expressed in quantitative terms (e.g. 2
,
                                                          turns,100 inch- pounds, etc.) compatible with
                                                          item being read.
'
                                                6.    Cautions and notes applicable to specific steps
3
                                                      inserted prior to performance of the step.
*                                              7.    The acceptance criteria for the Surveillance should
'
                                                      be specified in the process parameters the test uses.
                                                                                                                -    ~
-                                  7.11.5      A restoration section should contain the following:
;
)    C                                          1.    Detailed instructions for restoration of the
                                                      component (s) to its required configuration.
                                                                                                                        i
                                                      . Include verification of the operability of the
                                                            component, if practical.
                                                                                                                        '
l    C                                                  * Independent verification shall be perfonned on
                                                            safety-related system restoration.                          ,
                                                2.    A table to provide spaces for listing the test
                                                      equipment if required. All test instruments used to
                                                      record data in the test shall be listed by M&TE I.D.
                                                      Number and calibration duc date.
                                                3.    A channel check of the instrument for restoration
                                                        verification. Normally a table of like channel
                                                        comparison data.
      C                                          4.    Step fer notifying the Nuclear Control Operator of
                                                        test completion.
      C                                          5.    Step for notifying the OSS/CRS of test completion.
      C                        7.12  Acceptance Criteria
                                    7.12.1      Acceptance Criteria is that criteria which is required by
                                                  the governing document.
                                                    ADM-0015 REV - 17 PAGE 24 OF 45
 
                  Question 34                                                                        Key Answer / Comments                                                                  Recommendations
                  Given the following conditions:                                                    Answer:        b
                                                                                                                                                                                              Throw out question
                                    - The HPCS Diesel Generator had been in a normal                                                                                                          since there are 3 possible
                                            standby lineup                                          Reference:                                                                              correct answers.
                                    - An automatic start signal hasjust been received
                                    - The diesel generator has responded as designed                  SOP-0052,"HPCS Diesel Generator", Rev.12,
                                    - It has been determined that NO VALID start signal                                  Section 2.1.27, Page 6
                                            condition exists                                          LO - HLO-075-3 #10.b.3
                  What are the required IMMEDIATE actions for these                                  Comments:
                  conditions?
                                                                                                      The question stem does not provide adequate
                                    a.              Depress the local panel Emergency Stop          information for the candidate to identify a single
                                                    pushbutton and place the Engine Mode Control    correct response. The conditions are presented in
                                                    Switch in " TEST".                              such a way that two interpretations are possible.
                                    b. Depress the Main Control Room Emergency                        First case, as the question was originally intended,
                                                    Stop pushbutton and direct the local operator to an automatic start signal is " locked in" and has been
                                                    place the Engine Mode Control switch in          determined to not be valid. In this condition, the
                                                    "MAINT".                                          only way to stop the machine is to use the
                                                                                                      emergency stop pushbutton, as identified in answer
                                    c.              Place the Diesel Generator Mode Switch to        "b"(placing the mode switch in "MAINT" would
                                                    " LOCAL MANUAL" and direct the local              prevent subsequent restart; precaution 2.1.27 of
                                                    operator to place the Diesel Generator Control    SOP-0052)
                                                    switch to "STOP".
                                  d. Verify the Diesel Generator Mode Switch in
                                                    " REMOTE MANUAL" and place the Main
                                                    Control Room Diesel Generator Control switch
                                                    to "STOP".
                                                                                                                                          (continued next page)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .    _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _          .
                                                                                                          _ _ _ _ _ _  _      __ ..    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . _ _ _ _ ._ _ _ _ _ . . _ . ._
                                                                                                                                          _
 
                                      .
                                                                                    -
                                                                                        Key Answer / Comments                                  Recommendations
-
Question 34
                                                                                        Second case, although an automatic start signal has
                                                                                        been received, the statement in the stem "It has been
                                                                                        determined that NO VALID start signal condition
                                                                                        exists" implies no start signal or condition is
                                                                                        currently present. In this case, use of the emergency
                                                                                        trip button is not appropriate (see SOP-0052
                                                                                        precaution 2.1.22) and not required to stop the
                                                                                        machine. Both "c" and "d" would stop the diesel
                                                                                        under the circumstances described.
                                                                                        Note: The Diesel Generator mode switch positions
                                                                                        on the panel are " REMOTE" and " LOCAL" instead
                                                                                        of" REMOTE MANUAL" and " LOCAL
                                                                                        MANUAL". However, since both positions simply
                                                                                        set up the manual control functions, this level of
                                                                                      discrimination is not appropriate for determining the
                                                                                                                                              i
                                                                                      distracters are incorrect. (i.e. to eliminate "c" and
                                                                                      "d" the candidate would need to know the exact
                                                                                      switch nomenclature).
    . - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - .  _. _            _        - - . -    - -                  .. . . - _ _
 
                                                                            . _  .      -    -      _
!
l                __. 4      Generator reverse power.
1
                      5    Generator overcurrent
i
                      6    Engine low lube oil pressure
                      7.    Engine high temperature (jacket cooling water)
                      8.    Engine overcrank .:vcle 220 seconds with no start
            2.1.21    Anytime the diesel engice has tripped automatically, the operator is required
                      to depress the "STOP" pushbutton on IE22*PNLS001 engine panel or by
                      using the control switch on lH13*P601, (depending on where control is).
                      This will drop out the K1 relay which seals in upon a start. Failure to do so
                      will result in an automatic restart of the engine when the trip condition
                      clears.
      ---+ 2.1.22      Depressing the local or remote EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton will cause
                      a diesel tnp evea with an emergency start signal present. This pushbutton
                      should only be depressed under extreme emergencies. For normal eperation
                      the local or remote STOP pushbutton should be used.
            2.1.23    The IDTM*V62 TURBOCHARGER AIR BOX DRAIN VALVE must be
                      maintained throttled open during all operations involving running of the
                      diesel engine.
            2.1.24    When the diesel is running in parallel with the grid a fault on the grid could
                      cause a loss cf the bus associated with the diesel concurrent with a
                      trip / lockout of the diesel. To reduce the chances of this occurring minimize
                      the time spent with the diesel paralleled to the grid.
            2.1.25    Operating data pertaining to diesel generator start attempts shall be obtained
                      per PEP-0026. DIESEL GENERATOR TRENDING AND FAILURE
                        REPORTING.
            2.1.26    During diesel fuel oil unloading, a fire watch shall be stationed at the
                        unloading area and two (2) 150 pound dry chemical extinguishers placed
                        near unloading area.
  ___
        y 2 1.27 If the diesel receives an inadvertent auto start signal that is determined not
                        to represent a valid emergency start condition,immediately depress the local
                        or emote EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton then place the local ENGINE
                        CONT'.0L switch in the MAINT position. After the signal source has been
                        identitled and the auto start circuhs reset, depress the local or remote STOP
                        pushbutton prior to placing the local ENGINE CONTROL switch in the
                        AUTO position when returning the diesel generator to a standby mode.
i
                        Valid auto start signals are indicated as follows:
l
:                        1.  An ECCS auto start signal is identified at lH13*P601 by the white'
l                            indicating light at the HPCS INITIATION RESET pushbutton being
!                            illuminated and at IE22*PNLS001 by the white indicating light above
l                            the LOCKOUT RELAY being off.
                            SOP-0052            REV - 12    PAGE 6 OF 58
 
        .              .          -      -    .  .-- - _. - - . _ _ -                --        -- .- -
                                                                                                            '
,
i
              4.1.15.    Establish CRD System flow with isolated HCU/CRDs as follows:
;                                                  NOTE
                      A sufficient number ofHCUs must be aligned to accept
                      cooling waterflow at the minimumpow rate expected
                      through the C11-F002A(B), CRD Flow Control Valve.
                      Each CRD will accept about U3 gpm at approximately 15
                      psid. For example. if10 gpm systemflow is expected with
                      C11-F002A(B) fully closed, 30 HCUs must be alignedfor                                  ,
                      coolingjlow to limit cooling headerpressure to 15psid. A
                      higherflow rate orfewer HCUs will result in an
                      undesirable higher cooling header diferentialpressure.
                          1.  Align cooling water to at least 30 HCUs by opening as a minimum the
                              valves shown on Attachment 5, Post Maintenance Unisolated CRDs, to
                              allow for sufficient cooling water flew for CRD Pump start. The number
                              of HCUs may be increased or decreased at OSS/CRS discretion. The
                              following HCUs should be included in this group:
                                1) East Side (270 deg) - 04-33,04-29,04-25,04-21,04-17,08-13,
                                      12-13,16-09,12-09,24-05,20-05, and 16-05                              1
                              2) West Side (90 deg)- 52-37,52-33,52-29,52-25,52-21,52-17,48-17,
                                      48-13,44-09,44-13,40-09, and 36-09
  ^
                                                    CAUTION
    To prevent possible damage to an unvented CRD from an inadvertant scram, any HCU or
    CRD which has been opened for maintenance should remain isolated from the charging
    header with HCU-XXXX-V113 CHARGING WATER RISER ISOL VLV closed and
    HCU-XXXX-V107, SCRAM ACCUMULATOR DRAIN VLV opened one turn. Do ant
    unisolate charging water to the CRD until it has been vented.
                          2.  Verify charging water is isolated to any accumulators which were opened
                                for maintenance and document this verification on Attachment 6, Post
                                Maintenance Isolated Accumulators.
                            3.  IE the Reactor is depressurized, THEN open Cl1-VF062, DR WTR PC
                                STATION RELIEF LINE TO R.B. DRNS ISOL VLV.
                            4.  Start C11-COOI A(C001B), CRD PUMP A(B).
                                                                                                            l
                                                                                                            ;
                                                                                                            !
                                                                                                            !
                              SOP-0002            REV - 14              PAGE 9 OF 91
 
  _. _ _ _ _ _ _ _      __ _ __                __    _ _ . _ _ ._ .____ _ ._ _              .      _ _ _ _ _ _ _
!
                                                                CAUTION
                                                                                                                  l
        To prevent possible damage to an unvented CRD from an inadvertant scram, any HCU or
l
!
        CRD which has been opened for maintenance'should remain isolated from the charging
        header with HCU-XXXX-V113, CHARGING WATER RISER ISOL VLV closed, and
l
l
          HCU-XXXX-V107, SCRAM ACCUMULATOR DRAIN VLV opened one turn. Do nM
l        unisolate charging water to the CRD untilit has ber.n vented.
                    4.1.13.        VetLt charging water is isolated to any accumulators which were opened for      '
                                  maintenance and document this verification on Attachment 6, Post
                                  Maintenance Isolated Accumulators.
                    4.1.14.        Establish normal CRD System flow as follows:
                                    1.  Start Cl1-C001 A(C001B), CRD PUMP A(B).
                                    2.  Slowly open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK
                                        VLV.
                                                                    NOTE
                                It may take several minutesfor the accumulators to charge.
                                    3.  Check the accumulators are charged by observing:
                                        * At H13-P680, WHEN the Accumulator Fault Pushbutton is depressed,        i
                                            THEN All ACCUMULATOR lights on the full core display are off for
                                            the in service accumulators.
                                        * IE all accumulators are in service, THEN ACCUhEJLATOR
                                            TROUBLE annunciator at H13-P680 is clear.
          ;                        4.  Using Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER
                                        Cl1-F002A/B in MANUAL mode, and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER
                                        PRESS CONTROL VALVE, establish a Drive Water Differential Pressure
                                        of 250 psid at a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.
                                    5.  Go To Step 4.1.16.
                                        SOP-0002            REV - 14            PAGE 8 OF 91
                                                                                                ..
 
    _ _ . _ .. .. _ _._.        _ . _. ____          _ _ _._      _ _ - . . _        _ _ _ . . _ . ._        . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
s
i                                                                                                                                  '
:
                                                                                                                                    I
                                                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                                                  ,
i'
                            4.1.3.          Check the oil level for CRD Pump A(B) and its associated gear box is normal.          l
                                                                                                                                  i
                            4.1.4.          Vent the online CRD Pump Suction Filter using DER-V3002(V3004),                      l
,
                                            Cl1-FLT010A(B) VENT VALVE.
'.                          4.1.5.          Vent both the CRD Pump A and B casings using C11-VF109A and B, CRD
I                                          PUMP A and B CASING VENT VLV.                                                        l
1
,
                            4.1.6.          Vent the online CRD Pump Discharge filter using C11-VF022A(B), CRD
-
                                            PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV and DER-V8(V10),
:                                            C11-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE.
;
d
                            4.1.7.          Start Cl1-C001 AP(BP), CRD AUX OIL PUMP A(B).
:
i                          4.1.8.          Verify Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B) white light comes on.
:
                            4.1.9.          Close, then throttle open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP
)                                            CHECK VLV open one turn off the closed seat.
,
l.s                        4.1.10.          Place Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER
i                                            C11-F002A/B in MANUAL at.0% output.
Y
                            4.1.11.          Verify suction pressure is at least 15 psig on local indicator Cl1-R017A(B).
                                                                        NOTE
.                                        All 145 HCUs are not required to be in a normal valve
b                                        lineup prior to starting the CRDpumps. HCUs which have
1                                        been isolated for maintenance cannot befully returned to
l                                        service until after the CRD pump is operating.
i
-
                            4.1.12.          IE more than 12 HCU/CRDs were isolated for maintenance, THEN Go To Step
.
                                              4.1.15 for HCU alignment and CRD Pump start.
i
8
                                                                                                                                  i
3                                                                                                                                  l
j                                                                                                                                  !
a
:
,
4
1
i
i
                                                SOP-0002          REV - 14      PAGE 7 OF 91
                        -_          -_                          -            _-                                        -
 
      -.  .              .-        -        -..    . . - - ~ . _          .  ._-      .-      , . --
:
.
          3.2  Check Condensate Storage, Makeup, and Transfer is in operation per SOP-0008,-
              Condensate Storage, Makeup, and Transfer System.
;        3.3  Check Drywell and Containment Leak Detection is in operation per SOP-0033, Leak
  '
              Detection.
1        3.4  Check Reactor Plant Component Cooling Water is in operation per SOP-0016. Reactor
              Plant Component Cooling Water System.
.        3.5  Check Nuclear Boiler Instrumentation is in operation per SOP-0001, Nuclear Boiler
.
              Instrumentation.
.
.
          3.6  Check Reactor Protection is in operation per SOP-0079, Reactor Protection System.
4
          3.7  Check the following electrical systems are in operation:
j
i              3.7.1.      4160 VAC per SOP-0046
.
              3.7.2.      480 VAC per SOP-0047
              3.7.3.        120 VAC per SOP-0048
!              3.7.4.        125 VDC per SOP-0049
:
i
i        3.8  Verify B33 MOVF023 A and B, Recire Pump Suction Valves are open to prevent
!
              overpressurization of the Recirculation Pump Piping.
                                                                                    '
                                                    NOTE
'
k                      All 145 HCUs are aal required to be in a normal valve
                        lineupprior to starting the CRDpumps. HCUs which have
i                      been isolated for maintenance cannot befully returned to
i                      service until after the CRDpump is operating.          -
.
.
          3.9  Verify system is lined up for startup.
4    4    SYSTEM STARTUP
l                                                                                      .
.
    1      4.1  Placing the CRD System in Operation
                4.1.1.        Charge all HCU Accumulators which are lined up for startup with nitrogen per
                                                                                              -
:
                              Section 4.3.
;
                4.1.2.      Verify that the Reference Leg Backfill System has been isolated per
                              SOP-0001.
                                SOP-0002          REV - 14        PAGE 6 OF 91
 
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            --                                  ._                                                .      .            ,,
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        05280025
                                                                                                                                                                                                    ENT
                            9 PSID
                                                  25 HG. ABS                                        RWCU                                              l                                          REF. LEG
CST                      (apAnj                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        ^
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  "
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MANUAL        AIR
                            SUCTION                        CRD                                                            E I                                                                        d'
                              FILTERS                      PUMPS                          20 PSID      s6                                              l
                                                                                        {APAHj                                                          I
                                                                                                                                                        l
                    STRAINERS                      A
                                                ~
                                                                                                            CONT.I
                                                                %                  ''
                                                                                    "'
                                                                                                  ''
                                                                                                  "'            ISOL. t
                                                                                                                                                                                                                0-2500 PStG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              ., ,, ,,
CONDENSATE
                                      -m
                                                            g    I                                                                                        g                                                                                                                                                    --              -,
    SYSTEM      mm
                - '
                        . .
                                      - '                                              DeSCHARGE                                                          ,
                        T                                  g "i                          FILTERS                                                                                                RECIRC                                                                                                                4
                                                                            20 GPM                                                                                                          SEAL PURGE 1600 PSIG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ( PAL }-
                                                                  _T__
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            "
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      A      E    AIR
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            NT
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  i                                                                                                  MANUAL
                                                                    T                  CHARGING WATER HEADER
                                                                                                  ,
                                                                                                                                                                                                  :,H ,H ,H':
                                                                                                                                                                                                          i
                                                                                    N                                                                                                              FLOW RESTRICTING
                                                                                                                                                                                                      ORIFICES
            3 CRD HYD CONTROL UNIT
                                                                        CRDM              250*F I
            3 (TYPICAL OF 145)
                                                                    (TYP. OF 145)
                                                                                            TAH)l
            1                                                                                    I                                                                                                                    REACTOR                                                                                                                  '
            I                                                                                                                                                                                                          PRESSURE
            I
                                          -                            _,,_    __                l EQUALIZING                                                                                                        ING                                                                                                      DRIVE
            g                                                                                        VALVES
                                              -                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            "ny'                                              WATER
            l
            I                                        O
                                                        l-
                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                                  [
                                                                                                                  -,                                                                                          g
                                                                                                                                                                                                                ap
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    $50 PSU
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            p
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                AP
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0-350
            I                                                                                                      RV                                                                                                                                                        _
            I
                                ,
                                l                  gs                        EKHAUsr waren McAnen
                                                                                                  g    85 PSID                                                                                py,,        ,m,
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                psto
            3                                        INLET                                                                                                                                                          ''
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        PCV
                                              A                                                  3
                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            II
                                                                                                                    RV                                                                  VENTS
              I                "2              N#                520            I27              I                                                                                                                                                                            S
                                                              -                          -
                                                                                                        75 PSID
              I
                                              %d
                                                                                                      ~~~g
              i
                                                                      ,
                                                                                                                                      ; Spy                                                                      0-70 GPM                                                                                                      0-5
                                                            DIRECT                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          (TYP OF 4)
                                                                                                                                I                                                                                                                    STABLIZING
              I                        d                  CONTROL                                                            I                                                                                CONTAINMENT                                    VALVES                                                                        )(
              g                                            VALVES                                  VALVE I
              :                                                                                                                                                                                            -+ EQUIPMENT                    (TYPICAL OF 4)
                                                  60cc H,0                                                                      g
                                                                                                                                                                                            DRAINS                DRAINS                                                                                                                    '~
              3                                                                                                                ,
              l
                                  ( AH/L ) 1600 PSIG
                                                                                                                                l                            DRIVE WATER HEADER (TYP. OF 4)
              e----------------------------__,
              I
                                            .
                                            CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          _
R:S.1.STM oPST.Aw52 .                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            i
                                                                                                                                                                                                e
                                                                                                        _ _ _ _ _ - - - . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . - _ . _ . - - - . _ _ - . .- . - _ _ - _ _ _ . . _                                . - . _ . _ - - . _ . . _ . . .__.__ --__.-- _-___.-.___.-__ _-.__-._______ -_____
 
                                                                  -
                                                                                                          l
                    ..                                                                                    ;
                                                                                                            !
          3. Remote Controls and Indications
              *
                    Remote Flow Indicator C11-FIR 606 (H13-PNLP601)- 0-100 GPM
                                                                                                            1
              =
                    Flow Controller Cl1-FCR600 (H13 PNLP601) Manual / Auto control
              *    Flow Controller Valve Cl 1-FVF002A/B (H13-PNLP601) Indicating Lights-GREEN-
                    CLOSED, RED-OPEN
          4. Automatic Features
              Valve fails closed on loss ofinstrument air
1.3.2.7    Drive Water Header (Figure 1)                                                                    !
            1. Description                  *
                                                                                                  ,
                                                                                                            :
              There are 4 drive water headers each is equipped with a stabilizing unit. The stabilizing
              valves are controlled automatically by RCalS. They will close during control rod
              movement to divert water from the cooling water header to the drive water header. This
              is done to maintain a constant system pressure during rod movement.- The stabilizing
              valve units consist of two normally open parallel solenoid operated valves. Needle valves
              down stream of each stabilizing valve are set such that each valve passes 2 gpm. On a        ;
              control rod insert both stabilizing valves close which provides a 4 gpm flow to the bottom  !
                of the drive piston. On a control rod withdraw one stabilizing valve closes which
                provides a 2 gpm flow to the top of the drive piston.
        t      Drive water pressure is manually controlled by Pressure Control Valve Cl1-MOVF003 at
                reactor pressure plus 250 psig. Drive water pressure may also be controlled by a manual
                bypass around the Pressure Control Valve. Should drive water exceed 550 psid a relief
                valve opens relieving to the cooling water header. This feature avoids the possibility of
                excess water pressure causing excessive control rod drive speeds.
nne.c,u encranne,an                                                        o scc se ncis
 
Question 41  Comments                                                        Recommendations
              SOP-0002," Control Rod Drive System" 4.1 Section
              " Placing the CPS System in Operation," states that
              system flow and drive pressure will need to be
              adjusted to obtain a d/p of 250 psid. Throughout this
              procedure, during normal system operations and
              evolutions, drive pressure will need to be adjusted
              to obtain and maintain a d/p of 250 psid. STM-
              A0052.00 states that," Drive water pressuce is
              manually controlled by PCV at reactor pressure plus
              250 psig."
__        _
                        . ___ _ -_ - __-_- - ___-_-___ - ___ __ - _ __ - . --.
                          _                                                                    ._ .-
 
                                                      .    __    m .        _ .                                            _                                        -.                                                _        _      . . .        _      _    _
                                                                Key Answer / Comments                                                                                                                                                          Recommendations
Question 41
Prior to a startup with the plant in a cold, depressurized      Answer:                              c                                                                                                                                        Throw out this question,
condition, the Unit Operator adjusts the Control Rod Drive                                                                                                                                                                                    since there is no correct
Ilydraulic (CRD) system Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to                                                                                                                                                                                        answer.
maintain 250 psid between drive water header pressure and      Referenec:
reactor pressure.
                                                                STM-A0052.00
llow is this pressure differential maintained as reactor        SOP-0002
pressure increases during the ensuing startup to 100%
power? (Assume the CRD system is operating as designed.)        Comments:
As reactor pressure increases during the startup:              No correct answer.
        a.  the Pressure Control Valve automatically          Answer (c) assumes that the system is operating
            operates to maintain CRD system pressure above    differently than the installed design. If the CRD
            reactor pressure.                                  system is operating as installed (the design has not
                                                                been changed), then the Pressure Control Valve
        b. the Unit Operator must periodically open the        must be periodically throttled closed to maintain the
            Pressure Control Valve to maintain the required    differential pressure between drive water header
            differential pressure.                            pressure and reactor pressure. During a plant
                                                                startup, the Pressure Control Valve must be throttled
        c.  the Flow Control Valve automatically opens to      in the closed direction to maintain the differential
            maintain a constant flow, therefore a constant d/p pressure between CRD water and reactor pressure,
            across the PCV.                                    as reactor pressure increases.
        d. the Unit Operator must periodically adjust the
            Flow Control Valve to maintain CRD system
            pressure above reactor pressure.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      (continued next page)
                                                                            -_ _ -_-__--- - - - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - _ - - - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _ - - _ - _ _ - - _ _ - _ - - - - - _ _ _
 
                                            .        - . _ _
        __  2.    An undervoltage auto start signal is identified at IH13*P601 by the DIV
                    Ill 4KV BUS UNDERVOLTAGE annunciator being in alarm. There is          .
                , no indication of an undervoltage auto start signal at IE22*PNLS001.      l
                                                                                            !
22  Engine Gooling System                                                                  j
    2.2.1    Do not open expansion tank 611er cap unless the system is cool. Then          ;
            partially open the filler cap to relieve pressure prior to complete removal of l
            the cap.
    2.2.2    Ensure Immersion Heater control switch is in "OFF" anytime the cooling        .
            system or immersion Heater is not filled with coolant.                        l
2.3 Fuel Oil System
    2.3.1    Anytime work is done on the fuel oil day tank level instrumentation the
            control switch for the Fuel Oil Transfer Pump must be placed in "OFF" to
            preclude pumping diesel fuel to the roof.
    2.3.2    If the diesel is run for one hour or longer, check and drain from the day
            tank any accumulated water via valve IEGF*V71 DAY TANK DRAIN.
                                                                                        *
2.4 Lube Oil System
    2.4.1    Do not remove round caps from tube oil strainer housing with the engine
            runmng.
    2.4.2    Before attempting to start a new engine or one that has had internal
            maintenance performed a prelubrication must be performed in accordance
            with the EMD Vendor's Manual.
    2.4.3    Before any Normal start of the standby diesel proper prelubrication shall be
            verified in accordance with Section 4.2.1.
    2.4.4    The engine oil sump level should be between the LOW and FULL marks on
            the dipstick with the engine running. The level should be just above the 3/4
              FULL mark with the engine idle.
    2.4.5    The lube oil system level should be between the upper and lower
              sightglasses with the engine shutdown and above the upper sightglass with
              the engine running.
    2.4.6 \ After changing oil filter elements or performing any evolution which
              involves draining the accessory on system of the diesel, the oil system must
              be refilled, the strainer box verified full, and the SOAKBACK (Turbo)
              LUBE OIL pumps operated for at least 30 minutes prior to starting the
              engine. The engine should then be brought to an unloaded condition to
              assure complete filling of accessories before any subsequent loading is done.
    2.4.7    Oil level in the engine governor should be maintained at or above the fill
              mark on the sightglass with the diesel shutdown. With diesel in operation
              the suggested level is    1/4" of fill mark.
                SOP-0052            REV - 12      PAGE 7 OF 5%
 
    ..        .. . . . - . - .                        .    .-              --        . .  ..-                -_ _
                                5.    Close, then slowly open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP
                                      CHECK VLV.
3
                                                            NOTE
'                        It may take several minutesfor ti' recumulators to charge.
                                6.    With exception of the accumulators listed on Attachment 6, Post
4
                                        Maintenance Isolated Accumulators; at H13-P680, WHEN the
                                        Accumulator Fault Pushbutton is depressed, THEN All
5                                      ACCUMULATOR lights on the full core display are off for the in service
4                                      accumulators.
                                7.    WHEN flow has stabilized, E Cl1-VF062, DR WTR PC STATION
                                        RELIEF LINE TO R.B. DRNS ISOL VLV was opened in Step 4.1.15.3,
                                        THEN close the valve while monitoring cooling header differential
;                                      pressure. E cooling header differential pressure exceeds 30 psid, THEN
'
                                        secure the CRD Pump. Pump startup may be re-attempted after additional
4
                                        HCUs are aligned for cooling flow.
l
                                                            NOTE
                          A lowerflow rate may be established as required by the
h
                          Operatiom Shift Superintendent as long as adequate
,
                          cooling isprovidedfor the CRDs.
:
f      L                        8.    Adjust system flow and drive pressure using Cl1-R600, CRD
                                        HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-
                                        F003, CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a
                                        flow equal to 0.31 times the number of CRDs aligned for cooling flow and
                                        a differential pressure of 250 psid.
i          4.1.16.                E the Reactor is depressurized, THEN fill and vent the system in accordance
i                                with Section 4.2.
t
!
      4.2 System Fill and Vent
                                                              NOTE
s
                            Fill and vent ofthe CRD System and HCU/CRDs is nal
                            required ifthe Reactor is pressurized.
j
            4.2.1.                Verify the CRD System is in operation per Section 4.1.
  !
i
i
!
                                      SOP-0002          REV - 14        PAGE 10 OF 91
!
                              _    _
 
                                                                                                    !
    SYSTEM NORM AL OPERATION
                                                                                                    .
  5                                                                                                  l
                                                          .
    5.1  Alternating CRD Pumps
                                                                                                    i
                                              NOTE
        To minimize the potential impact ofpressure transients in the CRD                          l
                                                                                                    j
        Hydraulic System, shifting CRD Pumps when Reactor pressure is
        greater than 0 psig but less thanfull operating pressure should be
        avoided except in extraordinary circumstances.                                            l
        5.1.1.    Perform the following steps for the CRD Pump to be started.
                    1.    Check that the oil level for CRD Pump A(B) and its associated gear box is  ,
                          normal.                                                                  l
                    2.    Close Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.
C
                    3.    Vent the CRD Pump A(B) casing using Cl1-VF109A(B), CRD PUMP
                          A(B) CASING VENT VLV.
                    4.    Start Cl1-C001 AP(BP), CRD AUX OIL PUMP A(B).
                    5.  Verify white light comes on for Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B).
                                                                                                    i
                    6.    Stan C11-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B) and immediately, but slowly,            l
C
                          open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.
                    7.    Verify CRD Pump A(B)is operating properly.
          5.1.2.    Check that CRD System flow has stabilized.                                    j
          5.1.3.    Perform the following steps for the CRD Pump to be stopped:
                      1.  Close Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.
                                                                                                    !
                      2.  Stop Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B).
          5.1.4.    Vedfy that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are normal. IE they are
                      NOI, THEN use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW                              l
                      CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS
                      CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to establish an
                      indicated value for Ddve Water DitTerential Pressure of 250 psid and a flow
                      rate of 41 to 49 gpm.
                        90P 0002          REV - 14      PAGE 20 OF 91
 
  - . -. . - . . - . - - - -                            . - . _ . . _              . -    - - -          . - . - - - - -
l
t
.                                                                                                                          i
'
                                                                                                                          !
.                                                                                                                          .
l
                                  5.1.5.    Slowly reopen Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK                    l
                                            VLV for the CRD Pump which was stopped.
                                                                                                                          ,
                              5.2 Alternating Flow Control Valves
                                                                        NOTE                                              l
                                          Changeover ofthe Flow Control Valves is performed at the
                                          Local Flow ControlStations. C11-D009A(B) unless
                                          otherwise noted.                                                                  l
                                  5.2.1.    Verify Cl1-VF127A(B), INST AIR SPLY TO Cl1-FV-F002A(B) is open.                3
                                  5.2.2.    Verify the following for the flow control valve to be placed in service:
                                            1.  Flow Control Valve AUTO / MANUAL Transfer Switch in MANUAL.
                                            2.    Manual control knob adjusted to its minimum position.
                                  5.2.3.    Open C11-VF046A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) INLET ISOL VLV, for
                                            the flow control valve to be placed in service.
                                  5.2.4.    Open C11-VF047A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) OUTLET ISOL VLV,
                                            for the flow control valve to be placed in service.
                                  5.2.5.    Slowly open the standby Cl1-FV-F002A(B), CRD FLOW CONTROL
                                            VALVE, and observe the previously irservice Cl1-FV-F002A(B), CRD
                                            FLOW CONTROL VALVE, de3es.
                                  5.2.6.      WHEN the previously inservice flow control valve is fully closed, THEN
                                              adjust its manual control knob to minimum position, and place its
                                              AUTO / MANUAL Transfer Switch in MANUAL.'
                                  5.2.7.    Verify that the automatic and manual signals of the flow control valve being
                                              placed in service are matched. Then place the AUTO / MANUAL Transfer
                                              Switchin AUTO.
                                  5.2.8.    Close Cl1-VF047A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) OUTLET ISOL VLV,
                                              for the flow control valve being removed from service.
                                  5.2.9.    Close Cl1-VF046A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) INLET ISOL VLV,
                                              for the flow control valve being removed from service.
                                    5.2.10.    Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.
                                                SOP-0002              REV - 14    PAGE 21 OF 91
 
  . .- .      . - .    .  - . . -                . . .      - - -  . - -      .    -    .- -.-_- -..            --
                                                                                                                      '
!
'
                                                                                                                      :
                                                                                                                      .
          O        5.2.11.        In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are      ,
                                    normal. IE they are nal, THEN use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW                    !
                                    FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER
                                    PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to
                                    establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250 psid
                                    and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.
                                                                                                                        )
          5.3      Alternating Discharge Filters
l
                    5.3.1.          Verify the Cl1-PDIS-N002, Filter Differential Pressure Indicating Switch is in    l
                                    operation.
l
                    5.3.2.          Perform the following for the filter to be placed in operation.
                                      1.  Open Cl1-VF020A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTERS D003A(B) INLET
                                          ISOL VALVE.
                                    2.    Open Cl1-VF022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003 A(B) VENT
                                          VLV and DER-V8(V10), Cl1-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE. WHEN
                                          air-free water is vented from filter, THEN close Cl 1-VF022A(B), VENT
,
                                          VALVE and DER-V8(V10), Cl 1-FLTD003 A(B) VENT VALVE.
                                    3.    Slowly open Cll-VF021 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B)
                                          OUTLET ISOL VLV.
                    5.3.3.          Perform the following for the filter being removed from service.
                                                                                                                        i
                                                                                                                        I
                                                                                                                        I
                                                              CAUTION
        Backflow thrsgh the filter could damage the filter cartridge. Do nal.close C11-VF020A(B)
        before closing C11-VF021 A(B).
                                      1.  Close Cl1-VF021 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) OUTLET
                                            ISOL VALVE.
                                      2.    Verify proper filter operation by observing Cl1-PDIS-N002 is in normal
                                            band.
                                      3.  Close Cl1-VF020A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003 A(B) INLET
                                            ISOL VALVE.
                                          SOP-0002        REV - 14          PAGE 22 OF 91
 
  -. - . - - - -        -    - - . -            - - . - - . . - .        ..      . ..      ..  . .-  _
                                                                                                            i
                                                                                                          I
                5.3.4.  Drain the filter removed from service by performing the following:
                          1.      Open the following valves:
                                  /) Cl 1-F022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV                l
                                                                                                        '
                                  2) Cl1-VF023A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) DRAIN
                                        VLV
                                  3) DER-V8(V10), Cl 1-FLTD003 A(B) VENT VALVE
                                  4) DER-V9(V11), Cl1-FLTD003A(B) DRAIN VALVE
              '
                          2.      WHEN filter is completely drained, THEN close the following valves:
                                  1) Cl1-F022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV                  l
                                  2) Cl1-VF023 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) DRAIN
                                        VLV
                                                                                                          1
                                  3) DER-V8(V10), C11-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE                              l
                                  4) DER-V9(V i 1), C11-FLTD003 A(B) DRAIN VALVE
                                                                                                          1
                5.3.5.  Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.
                                                                                                          .
                5.3.6.  In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are
                          normal. IE they are HQI, THEN use C11-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS
                          FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER C11-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE
                          WATER PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed
                          to establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250
                          psid and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.
l
l
l
.
l
                                SOP-0002            REV - 14      PAGE 23 OF 91
1
 
                                                                                                    l
  5.4    Altemating Suction Filters
          5.4.1.    Verify that the Cl1-PDIS-N015, Filter Differential Pressure Indicating Switch
                    is in operation.
          5.4.2.    Perform the following for the filter to be placed in operation.
                    1.    Open C11-VF1ISA(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) INLET
                          ISOL VLV.
                    2.    Slowly open DER-V3002(V3004), C11-FLT010A(B) VENT VALVE.
                    3.    When air-free water is vented from the filter, close DER-V3002 (V3004),
                          C11-FLTO10A(B) VENT VALVE.
                    4.    Slowly open the C11-VF114A(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B)
                          OUTLET ISOL VLV.
          5.4.3.    Perform the following for the filter being removed from service.
                                              CAUTION
Backflow through the filter could damage the filter cartridge. Do no.t close C11-VF115A(B)
before closing C11-VF114A(B).
                    1.  Close Cl1-VF114A(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) OUTLET
                          ISOL VLV.
                    2.    Verify proper filter operation by observing Cl1-PDIS-N015 is in normal
                          band.
                    3.    Close Cl1-VF1ISA(B), CRD PUMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) INLET
                          ISOL VLV.
          5.4.4.    Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.
t        5.4.5.    In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are
                    normal. IE they are not,11Ed use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW                !
                                                                                                    l
                    FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER            ~
                    PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to
                    establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250 psid
                    and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.
                        SOP-0002          REV - 14        PAGE 24 OF 91
 
  . _ - _ - . _ - - .                    - _ - - _ _ - - - - _ - _ - - - - - _ - - - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - - - - - - _ - _ _                - - - _ _          -        . _ - - _ - _ ._.      - _ - - -
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    i
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    I
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    !
.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    i
a
                    Question 46                                                                                                  Key Answer / Comments                                    Recommendations
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    >
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    :
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    i
                    Which of the following is indication that a failure of both                                                  Answer:                b                                Accept both answers (a)  i
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    I
                    seals on one recirculation pump have occurred?                                                                                                                        and (b).
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ;
]                          a.  Drywell identified leakage will decrease and                                                      Reference:                                                                        ;
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    t
                                unidentified leakage will increase.
                                                                                                                                STM-A0053.01                                                                        ;
                            b. Drywell identified leakage will increase and                                                                                                                                          ;
,
j                              unidentified leakage will increase.                                                              Comments:                                                                          !
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    !
                            c.  Drywell identified leakage will increase and                                                    Response (a) could also be correct. The amount of                                  ,
                                unidentified leakage will decrease.                                                              leakage (where and how detected) depends on the                                    l
,                                                                                                                                location and severity af the seal failures.                                        [
                            d. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and
                                unidentified leakage will decrease.                                                              Response (a) would be correct for a catastrophic                                    !
                                                                                                                                failure of the outer seal with a minor failure of the                              !
j                                                                                                                                inner seal. In this case, flow to the Drywell                                      l
                                                                                                                                Equipment Drain Sump (identified leakage ) is                                      !
                                                                                                                                reduced due to a drop in pressure between the seals
                                                                                                                                caused by less resistance to flow into the Drywell                                  ;
!                                                                                                                                atmosphere (unidentified leakage).                                                  j
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    .
;                                                                                                                                Response (b) would be correct for a minor failure of
                                                                                                                                the outer seal. This is due to an increase in pressure                              ;
j                                                                                                                                between the seals where flow to the Drywell                                        !
;
                                                                                                                                Equipment Drain Sump (identified leakage) would
                                                                                                                                increase with a corresponding increase in leakage to                                [
                                                                                                                                the Drywell atmosphere (unidentified leakage) due                                j l
                                                                                                                                to the minor failure of the outer seal.                                          j j
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  ! !
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    <
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ,
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    i
                                                                          .
 
      1.3.5.3    Remote Controls and Indications
                  The indicators on H13-PNLP680 show the pressure drop across each seal during
                  normal operation (see Figure 5). During normal operation, No. I seal cavity pressure
                  should read approximately 10-15 psig greater than RPV pressure, and No. 2 Seal
                  Cavity pressure should read approximately 1/2 the value of seal cavity No.1. If the
                  No. I seal has a gross failure, seal cavity No. 2 pressure increases to the value of seal
                  cavity No. I and RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGING HIGH/ LOW FLOW (H13-
                  PNLP680) alarms. Should seal No. 2 fail, the RECIRC PUMP A (B) OUTER SEAL
                  HIGH LEAKAGE annunciator (H13-PNLP680) alarms, the No. 2 Seal Cavity
                  pressure lowers, and the RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGE HIGH/ LOW FLOW
                  (H13-PNLP680) alarms.
        :
                  If both seals fail, the pressure in cavity #1 remains about the same. The pressure of
                  cavity #2 may go higher or lower depending on which seal is worse. Additionally, at
                  this point, there is significant seal leakage, which is indicated by a rise in
                  unidentified leakage. Both the RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGING HIGH/ LOW
                  FLOW annunciator (H13-PNLP680) and the RECIRC PUMP A(B) OUTER SEAL
                  HIGH LEAKAGE annunciator (H13-PNLP680) alarm.
                  It is also possible to have a partial seal failure which would cause pressure
                  indications to respond as described above but not cause an alarm actuation.
      1.3.5.4    Automatic Functions
                  The Reactor Recirculation Pump A(B) Seal Flow Outlet Isolation Valve (B33-
                  FVF075A(B)) is now operable. The valves are OPEN regardless of switch position if
                  the respective recire pump is on line. The valves open if OPEN switch is depressed
                  and the respective pump is off-line. The valves closes when AUTO switch is
                  depressed and the respective pump is off-line.
      1.3.5.5    Power Supplies
                  N/A
l
l
  RBS-1-STM-GPST-A0053.00                                                  PAGE 16 OF 69
 
                                                                                                                                              053c0022
                                                                                                                                                        l
                                                        SEAL STAGING VALVE
                                                                                                              SEAL LEAKAGE 50 OZNR NORMAL
        1 gpm                              4                                                      ^        3.072 OZNR MAXIMUM
                                                                        T3                            M
  SEAL STAGING                                                                            S "'"E"  -
  LUID OUT        1 GPM NORMAL                                                        M          UPPER
                                                                                                      g
                  1.4 GPM MAXIMUM                                                              ^
                                                                            P
                  (1 SEAL FAILED)                                            2/              SEAL *B"
            C.W. IN 20 gPM 66 -t id F
                            ,,      ,
                                                    1000
                                                          +        T2
                                        :P            e pst                                    LOWER
                                        '                                                          SEAL
          INJECTION      l
                                          s
          WATER IN                I
                                      J                                                          SEAL *A*
            3-5 GPM                                                                                                                                    l
        AT 60' 100' F                      HEAT
                                            EXCH.                                                  RECIRC
                                                                                            V DISC
                                                4E
                                                  '                                                                                                    !
                                                                          ,                    BEARING
                                                  '
                    C.W. OUT                            y
                                                            f                                    RESTRICT
                    ................'                              71                            BUSHING
                                                                                pump        r
                                                                                em                                                                    j
                                                                                ia20 PSG AT 535*F
                                                                                            i              i
                                                CONDITION A - NORMAL
                                                      SEAL STAGING VALVE
                                                                                                              SEAL LEAKAGE
                                                                                            gg
                                                              I' '    I"                LEAKAGE              50 OZHR
  SEAL STAGING                                                                  "T'GHAMBER
  LUID OUT        1 GPM NORMAL                                                                  S
                                                                                                                          P    PRESSURE TAP
                                                                          p
4
                                                                            2              SEAL *B"
                      -      - . .' 5                                            l
                                                                                      '
                                                                                                                          T    THERMO COUPLE
                                      *
                                            P        gh          T2                            LOWER
                                                                                                  SEAL                ---- COOLING WATER
                                        '
                        O                                                                                                      REACTOR WATER
        CHECK VALVE lI.              '
                                                                                                  SEAL *A.
            CLOSED
                                            HEAT
                                          EXCH.                                                  RECIRC                          m        m
                                                                                                    DISC                      sucTON      IMCTON
                                                                                                                          I'    "'T        ' 50 T
                                                          _
                                                                          m                    BEARING
                                                                                                                          T    112 4      issy
                                                ,        I                                                                  2
                    C.W. OUT                    ,        I
                                                                                                RESTRCT                          '          '"
                    4 ..............                    *        T1                                                      '
                                                                                          h BUSHING
                    LOW R.OW                                                            _
                                                                                                                          p,    ,a2e pSo  ia20pSo
                      '                                                                                ^
                                                                                Q'            i Gaw -ouT                Pr    510 PSG    $10 PSG
                                                                          4
                                                                                                          i
                                                                                                                        TABLE BASEO ON
                                                                                                                              INJECTION TEMP = 110 F
                                                                                                                          ~" * * ' ' " ' ' " " ' ' " "
                                      CONDITION B - LOSS OF INJECTION
                    RECIRCULATION PUMP SEAL FLOWS
  RBS-1.STM-A0053.00                                                                                                                    FIG 7/TP-08
 
      - . - - . -            _ -        _ - . - . -                  - -          . - -      . .    -...          .  ._-- -
                                                                                                                          _
N
J
!
                                                              the hotwell increases cooling load on RWCU
3
                                                              non-regenerative heat exchangers. That increased
,
                                                              load will increase the cooling water temperature to
;                                                              the recire pump seals. This has caused pressure
                                                              oscillation of up to 70 psig on second stage seals.
                                  7.' a Drywell
!                                      .            . Failure of seals or excessive pump seal leakage will result in
I
                                                      increased drywell pressure and increased load on the drywell
                                                      coolers.
                                      .              Excessive pump seal leakage increases unidentified leakage in
                                                      the drywell.
]
                                  7.3.4 Venting
                                      e              Inadequate venting of the seals has been a significant problem
!
d
                                                      affecting seal life.
  l
;
            TP-06                7.3.5 Normal seal cavity pressure indications will show No. I seal
                                                pressure approximately 10-15 psig greater than reactor
                                                pressure.
i
;                                      e              No. 2 seal pressure will indicate approximately 1/2 the value of
!                                                    No. I seal pressure.
.
l            OBJ #10            7.4      Technical Specifications applicable to the recirculation system
;
                                          include:
{                                  7.4.1        ATWS Recimulation Pump Trip System Instrumentation
l                                                (3/4.3.4.1).
                                  7.4.2 EOC-RPT System Instrumentation (3/4.3.4.2).
                                  7.4.3 Recimulation Loop (3.4.1.1).
.
l                                  7.4.4 Jet Pumps (3.4.1.2)
!
!                                  7.4.5 Recirculation Loop Flow (3.4.1.3)
l
    .                              7.4.6 Idle Recirculation Loop Startup (3.4.1.4)
              OBJ #14        8.0        Pump seal failure
,
                                8.1        Inner seal failure indications:
2
i            TP-06                    *            This will be indicated by seal No. 2 pressure rising to equal
-
                                                      seal No. I pmssure.
;
'
                  HLO-005-05                                                                        PAGE 26 OF 27
;
                                    .
                                                            ,                                            - - -
 
. . . -            ..  .  . - _ - _ _ _ _                                                _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _                                ._                    -_.                  __ _ --  _ ___                                  -_. __
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                t
                                                                                                                                            Key Answer / Comments                                                              Recommendations
Question 59
Following a normal reactor scram, at what point must the                                                                                    Answer:          d                                                                  Throw out question
At-The-Controls Operator be alert for narrow range reactor                                                                                                                                                                      since there are 3 possible
water Icvel indication " outgassing" or " notching"? (Assume Reference: GOP-0002                                                                                                                                                correct answers.
the Reference Leg Backfill system is NOT in service.)
        a.    If the cooldown rates exceed the Technical                                                                                    Comments:
              Specification limits.
                                                                                                                                            Response (a) and (b) are also correct.
        b. If the MSIVs close and pressure control is on the
              Safety Relief Valves.                                                                                                          GOP-0002, P&L 1.29,"If the Reft.rence Backfill
                                                                                                                                            System is not in service, then notching ... may occur
        c.  When the last Feed Pump is removed from                                                                                        as reactor pressure is lowered. A slow cooldown
              service.                                                                                                                      rate will decrease the effect of degassing the
                                                                                                                                            reference leg."
        d. As reactor pressure decreases below 450 psig.
                                                                                                                                            a.      To exceed Tech. Spec. limit of 100 F/hr,
                                                                                                                                                      pressure would have to decrease rapidly
                                                                                                                                                      from 1000psig to below 400psig, and
                                                                                                                                                      therefore outgassing could occor.
                                                                                                                                            b.      Opening SRVs without EHC system
                                                                                                                                                      compensation (MSIVs closed) is also rapid
                                                                                                                                                      depressurization (a condition that also
                                                                                                                                                      promotes outgassing).
                                                                                                                                            d.      industry experience indicates that notching
                                                                                                                                                    may occur- 450 psig and the ATC must be
                                                                                                                                                    alert.
                            _ _ - . - _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ __ _- -_._--___- _- ______ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -                                                              _ _ _ - - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _                    _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 
                                                                                          ATTACllMENT I
                                                                                              PAGE 5 OF 24
            POWER DECREASE / PLANT SliUTDOWN PERFORMANCE PACKAGE                                                  l
9      1.27  During Hot Standby conditions when feedwater flow rate is low, operation of the RWCU
                                                                                                              !
                                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                                  l
              system may cause feedwater line thermal stratification. Feedwater lines may be
              monitored for thermal stratification per SOP-0110 TAMARIS TEMPERATURE                                i
                                                                                                                  '
              SCANNER Display 33. If feedwater line thennal stratification is indicated by a delta
              temperature between the top and bottom of the feedwater line of greater than or equal to
              100 F refer to SOP-0009 REACTOR FEEDWATER SYSTEM.
        1.28  Minimize the time between reactor recirculation pump transfer to slow and stopping the
              second reactor feed pump.
  -+ 1.29      If the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service, then notching of reactor level
              mdication may occur as reactor pressure is lowered. A slow cooldown rate will decrease
              the effect of degassing the reference leg.
        1.30  if the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service, then a reactor level bias could
              develop from degassing of the level reference leg large enough to effect reactor level
              trips /isolations.
        1.31  Reactivity Controls During Reactor Shutdowns
                                                                                                            '
                        All control rod insertions shall be done using the Shutdown Control Rod
j              1.
                        Sequence Package unless otherwise recommended by the on-duty reactor
                        engineer.
                2.      Reactor power should be reduced with core flow prior to control rod insertions to
                        minimize fuel duty.
                3.      If substitute values are entered into the process computer that affect thermal          l
                        limits, the on-duty reactor engineer should update these values as necessary
                        during power reductions to ensure accurate thermal limit monitoring.
                4.      Prior to reducing power below the low power setpoint, the on-duty reactor
                          engineering should verify that all control rods are properly aligned per the BPWS
                          constraints.
                  5.      The reactor should be scrammed from e power level at which normal pressure
                          control is available (i.e., turbine control valves open) to preclude inadvertent or
                          uncontrolled reactivity changes due to reactor cooldown and depressurization.
                  6.      A reactor shutdown by manual control red insertion of all control rods shall not be
                          pennitted unless specifically authorized by the Operations Superintendent.
  )
                                GOP-0002          REV - 14        PAGE 10 OF 29
 
g,                                                                                      ATTACHMENT 1
                                                                                                        ',J
                                                                                                          t
                                                                                          PAGE 7 OF 24
            POWER DECREASE / PLANT SIIUTDOWN PERFORMANCE PACKAGE
O                                                                                                          ;
                                                                                                          .
      STEP                                                                                    INITIALS
    1.    Notify System Operator prior to decreasing generator load.
%    2.    If the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service per SOP-0001, then have
          1&C stage equipment, acquire necessary technicians and obtain PMs to backfill
          reactor water level reference legs. (Approximately 12 hours may be needed to
          prepare for backfilling.) Actual backfilling performance may commence when
          Operations Shift Superintendent authorizes. (It is desired to have backfilling                  4
                                                                                                          ,
          completed prior to reactor pressure reaching 450 psig to counter level indication              '
          notching possibilities.)
    3.    Monitor turbine vibration, bearing temperature and differential expansion.                      l
          Turbine Temp & Exoansion RCDR [lTMI-NXR102]
          a.      Differential Expansion Rotor Long (point 11) between 0.31 inches and
                                                                                                          !
                    0.69 inches. (Refer to ARP-870-54, G08, H08)
            b.      Rotor Expansion Rotor Long (point 12) between 0.455 inches and 1.545
                    inches,
h        Turbine Vibration RCDR ITMI-NXR1031
                                                                                                            l
                                                                                                            '
            a.      Vibration (points I thru 10) between 0 mils and 6 mils.
                    (Refer to ARP 870-54, D08)
                                                                                                            I
            Tamaris Comnuter (Display 69,70)
            a.      Bearing oil temperatures (< setpoint,180 F)
            b.      Bearing metal temperature (< setpoint,218.7'F)
            If unusual indications are observed, initiate hold in power change until those
            indications return to normal.
                                                  NOTE
                Ifcontrol rod movement is required consult the Reactor Engineer before
                movement.
      4.    Decrease reactor and turbine generator power by decreasing reactor recirculation              l
            flow and/or moving controls rods.
  h
                                GOP-0002        REV - 14        PAGE 12 OF 29
                                                                                                            l
 
      _ _.      _    _-            .._.. _ - _._. _ . _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
l
          1.0  PURPOSE
                11      To provide instruction to the Operations Section for positioning Root Valves in
                        the Nuclear Boiler Information System.
                I2      To provide input to the Operations Section from the Control and Instrumentation
l
                        Depanment that the Control and instrumentation Valves associated with the
l
                        Nuclear Boiler Instruments are aligned so as to place those instruments in service.
I
                I3      To provide direction for operating the Reference Leg Backfill System. The
                        function of the Reference Leg Backfill System is to purge out or keep out
                        dissolved non-condensible gasses from the reference legs; such that, upon a
                        depressurization non-condensible gas induced level errors will not occur. This
.
                          system resolves the issues described in Generic Letter 92-04 and NRC Bulletin 93-
!
                        03 concerning level errors created by non-condensible gasses coming out of
!                        solution and causing reference leg water inventory losses.
          2.0'  PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
i                21      The limitations of this system are includ.ed in Technical Specifications Sections:
                          2.1.3,2.1.4,2.2.1,3/4.3.1,3/4.3.2,3/4.3.3,3/4.3.4,3/4.3.5.3/4.37.4,3/4.3.7.5,
                          3/4.3.7.6, 3/4.6.1.6 and 3/4.9.8.                                                        j
                  2.2    Relationship of the Reference Leg Backfill System with Tech Specs:
l                        2 2.1        The Reference Leg Backfill System is considered a "suppon system"
                                        for the RPV Water LevelInstruments.
                          2.2.2          The Reference Leg Backfill System is intended to be used in Operating
                                        Modes 1 through 4; however, once the reactor is depressurized the
                                        backfill system is no longer required to operate.
l
                          2.2.3        If one channel becomes inoperative or out of service then it should be
i
                                        returned to service within 30 days. If not returned to service within
                                        this time frame then Technical Specifications (3/4.3.1,3/4.3.2,3/4.3.3,
    .
                                          3/4.3.4,3/4.3.5) should be consulted for required actions for .n
                                          inoperable reactor water level instrument channel; and a special repon,
                                        justifying continued operation, should be submitted to the NRC by the
                                          end of the 30 days.
                                          1.      Compensatory measures as discussed in NRC Bulletin 93-03 may
                                                    also be taken (i e. existing methods ofbackfilling/ purging the
l
i                                                  reference legs: MCP-4188, 4189, 4190, 4191)
  ,
                                              SOP-0001              REV-5              PAGE 3 OF 77
 
. _ _ . _ - - .                    . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ . _ _ _ _
          Question 80                                                                              Key Answer / Comments                                      Recommendations
          Given the following conditions:                                                          Answer:                                                    b Accept both answers (b)
                                                                                                                                                                and (d).
                  - A plant startup is in progress with the Reactor
                      Mode Switch in "Startup/ Hot Standby"                                        Reference:
                  - The Outboard Main Steam isolation Valves have
                      just been opened and steam line warming is in                                AOP-0010
                      progress
                  - Main condenser vacuum has been established                                    Comments:
                  - A loss of the "A" RPS Bus has just occurred
                                                                                                    Response (d) is also correct.
          Ilow will this bus loss affect the plant assuming it has NOT
          been restored as directed by AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS                                  AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS Bus," Secetion 1.1,
          Bus"?                                                                                    indicates that IAS*MOV106, Cntmt Air Isol. Valve
                                                                                                    isolates on a loss of RPS A. When IAS*MOV106
                  a.    The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves will                            closes this isolates Instrument Air to the
                        begin to drift close.                                                    Containment causing containment instrument air
                                                                                                  pressure to decrease eventually bleeding off and
                  b. Main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease.                                causing the scram valves to drift open. This will fill
                                                                                                  the scram discharge volume.                                                                ,
                                                                                                                                                                                              '
                  c.    The Recirculation Pumps will automatically trip.
                  d. The Scram Discharge Volume will begin filling.
                                                                          _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-___-__-____--- _-___ - _____ _ - ______- _ _ - _-__ - _- _ __- --___                    _ _ _ _ _ .
 
                                                                          . _ - . . - .
                                                                                        !
                                                                                        l
                                                                                        :
3  AUTOMATIC ACTIONS                                                                  !
                                                                                        ,
                                                                                        I
    3.1 Loss of RPS Bus A
        3.1.1.    Half scram on Channel A.
        3.1.2.    Division 1 NSSSS isolation.
        3.1.3.    Standby Gas Treatment A and Annulus Mixing A start.
        3.1.4.    Fuel Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment A starts.
        3.1.5.    Control Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment Train A
                  starts.
        3.1.6.    Control Building HVAC A re-aligns to the Charcoal
                  Ventilation Treatment Train.
        3.1.7.    CMS H 2Analyzer A auto starts.
  #    3.1.8.    ARC-PI A and ARC-PIB, COND AIR REMOVAL PUMPS
                  trip.
    3.2 Loss of RPS Bus B
        3.2.1.    Half scram on Channel B.
        3.2.2.    Division 11 NSSSS isolation.
                                                                                        l
        3.2.3.    Standby Gas Treatment B and Annulus Mixing B start.
        3.2.4.    Fuel Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment B starts.
        3.2.5.    Control Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment Train B
                  stans.
        3.2.6.    Control Building HVAC B re-aligns to the Charcoal                    :
                  Ventilation Treatment Train.                                          ;
                                                                                        :
        3.2.7.    CMS H2Analyzer B auto starts.
                                                                                        1
                                                                                        I
                                                                                        i
                                                                                        i
                      AOP-0010        REV-9          PAGE 4 OF 19
 
  . - - -      - . .    -    ..      .      -      - - -                  .      - - - . . - - . - . .              - .
                                                                                                  ATTACIIMENT I
2
                                                                                                            PAGE I OF 7
4
                        SUBSEQUENT OPERATOR ACTIONS FOR LOSS OF RPS BUS A
!
i
.                                                            NOTE                                                            1
>                              Reopening oflifS-MOV106 must be done in a timely
.                              manner to prevent the Inboard MSIVsfrom closing..
!
          l On H13-P601, depress the following to reset the isolation:
(                                                                                                              (Initials)
i
            e    B21H S33,INBD ISOLATION SEAL-IN RESET Pushbutton
j
j            . B21H-S32. OUTBD ISOLATION SEAL-IN RESET Pushbutton
;
;          2 At H13-P870, reopen the following isolation va!ves:
i
i
!                          RPS A                                  ISOLATED                        RESTORFD
i
            2.1      IAS-MOV106, INST AIR                          (Initials)                    (Initials)
                      OUTBD ISOL
            2.2      CCP-MOV138, CONTMT                            (Initials)                    (Initials)
                      SPLY OUTBD ISOL                                                                                        I
            2.3      CCP.MOV142, RR PUMP                          (Initials)                    (Initials)
                      CLG SUPPLY.
            2.4      CCP-MOV143 RR PUMP                            (Initials)                      (Initials)                I
                      CLG DN STREAM RTN                                                                                      i
            2.5      CCP-MOVl59, CONTMT RTN                        (Initials)                      (Initials)
                      OUTBD ISOL
          3 E CCP is lost to the Reactor Recire Pumps, THEN perform the following:
                                                                                                              '
              3.1      E there is a significant rise in Reactor Recirc Pump bearing or motor
                      stator temperatures, THEN manually trip the Reactor Recirc Pumps,
                                                                                                                finitials)
                                                                                                                              !
                                                                                                                              l
                                      A O P-0010            REV-9      PAGE 7 OF 19                                          ,
                                                                                                                              i
 
- - _ _      .      . -      .            _ _ _ _ - _ _                            _                          _ __                            . _ _ _ _ .
        Question 89                                                                                                          Key Answer / Comments                                                                                                                          Recommendations
        Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                                            Answer:                                                            a                                                                          Throw out question.
                - a reactor and plant startup is in progress with power                                                                                                                                                                                                      inappropriate from
                  at 2%                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    memory knowledge
                - RPV pressure is 800 psig                                                                                    Reference:                                                                                                                                    item.
                - The Reactor Mode Switch is in "Startup/Ilot
                  Standby"                                                                                                  Tech Spec 3.1.5
                - The "A" CRD Pump hasjust tripped
                - The "B" CRD Pump is baing lined up for a start                                                            Comments:
                - Scram accumulator 32-41 trouble alarm is in and has
                  been verified to be from low pressure (indicating                                                        This question is too detailed for a "from memory"
                  1500 psig)                                                                                                knowledge item. It is requiring the candidate to
                                                                                                                            know, from memory, a NOTE within the Technical
        Which of the following will the Control Room Supervisor                                                            Specifications, as compared to a required action
        (CRS) use to make the .                            rmination on declaring control rod                              item associated with a Limiting Condition for
        32-41 " Slow" or " Inoperable"? (Note: No other accumulator                                                        Operation (LCO) with an action less than I hour.
        trouble alamis are in.)                                                                                            Typically Notes within the Technical
                                                                                                                            Specifications do not need to be treated similar to
        ne determination is based upon:                                                                                    Notes within the EOPs (which are expected
                                                                                                                            memory knowledge items) requiring prompt
                a.      the control rods' last scram time surveillance                                                    interpretation and acGon.
                        results.
                b. the time charging water header pressure will be
                        less than 1520 psig.
                c.      the number of control rods fully withdrawn.
                d. drive water pressure availability to fully insen the
                        control rod.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                .
                    .- -              _ - - .                ____-_.__.-__._..-___.--_.._.___.-__--_--____-a.____      _ _ _ - _ _ - . .- - - - - - . - - _ - _ - - - - - _ _ _ - - _ _ - - _ - _ _ - - _ - - _ _ - _ _ _ _ - - - _ . - - - - - - = - - - _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _        -
 
                                                                Control Rod Scr.im Accumulators
                                                                                            3.1.5
  3.1  REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
  3.1.5  Control Rod Scram Accumulators
  LC0  3.1.5        Each control rod scram accumulator shall be OPERABLE.
  APPLICABILITY:    MODES I and 2.
  ACTIONS
  ....................................-NOTE-----------------------------------..
  Separate Condition entry is allowed for each control rod scram accumulator.
  ..............................................................................
              CONDITION                    REQUIRED ACTION                    COMPLETION TIME
;_  A.  One control rod scram    A.1      --------NOTE--------
        accumu'lator inoperable            Only applicable if
        with reactor steam                the associated
        dome pressure                      control rod scram
        a 600 psig,                        time was within the
                                            limits of
                                            Table 3.1.4-1 during
                                            the last scram time
                                            Surveillance.
                                            ....................
                                            Declare the                      8 hours
                                            associated control
                                            rod scram time
                                            " slow."
                                  O_R
                                  _
                                                                                                  i
                                    A.2    Declare the                      8 hours
                                            associated control
                                            rod inoperabic.
                                                                                    (continued)
    RIVER BEND                            3.1-15                              Amendment No. 81'
 
                        .
i                                            l
                ATTACHMENT 4
  FINAL WRITTEN EXAMINATION AND Afv$WER KEY
                                            l
                                            l
                                            l
                                            4
                                            l
}
                                            l
                                            l
                                            l
s
                                            !
l
a
n
4
                                            i
                                            !
4
 
  . . .        - _ . . _    ____- ._.  _ . _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ - . _  _      . - - _ _ . . - _ -
,
                          RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY
                        SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)
    ~001  b
                                                                          -  .. .
        002 d
                                                                                                      l
        003 b
        004 a
        005 a
        006 b
        007 a
        008 c
        009 b
        010 c
                                                                                                      l
        011 b
        012 c
        013 d                                                                                          ,
                                                                                                      I
        014 d                                                                                          j
        015 #C                                                                                        i
        016 a
        017 d
        018 c
        019 d
        020 d
                                      Page1of5
 
                                              I
                                              ,
              RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY
              SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)
021  h                                        l
022  e
023  a-
024  a
025  a
026  d
027  a  ab
028  c
029  d
030  h
031  h
.032  c-
033  c
034 X T eje E
035  a
036  d
037  b
038  c
039  d
  040  a
                          Page 2 of 5
                                              i
 
  . . . . . _ . _    __.      _  _ _ _ . . - _ _ . _ . . . _ . . _ _            . . _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ . . . _ _ _ . . . _
                                                                                                                    _          .
                                    RIVER BEND EXAM ANav exwhi
                                SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)
        041      .#      Pd < he ,                                                                                              ,
        042      a
        043      c
        044      e
        045      b
        046      b      s% C
        047      c
        048      b
        049      a
        050      b
                                                                                      '
        051      c
          052      d
                                                                                                                                  1
          053      d                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                                                  1
          054      b                                                                                                              ;
          055      a                                                                                                              j
          056      e
                                                                                                                                  j
l        057      b
          058      a
'
          059    F 3 .e. k a f o
t
.
          060      b
I
                                                                      Page 3 of 5
i
l
>
                                                                                                                            .-
 
    . _ . .      . _ _ _  . _ _ . _ . . _ . _ _ - - _ . _ . . _ _ _ . . . _ _ _ _ . . . _ . _ . _ . _ _ _ _ . _ .
i.
a
4                                                                                                                  i
                                        RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY                                                  l
;                                  SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)
4
                                                                                                                    b
            061      a
'
            062      d'
'
                                                                                                                    i
            063        h
                                                                                                                    .
1
;
            064        d
't
;-                                                                                                                  .
-
            065        h
            066        d
t
                                                                                                                    '
1          067        h
:
'
            068        h
i                                                                                                                  i
4
            069        e.                                                                                          ;
i          070        e                                                                                          3
4
;          071        c
:                                                                                                                  1
4
            072        b
i
I            073        d
:
            074        b
                                                                                                                    l
1
:            075        e
,
.!
j            076        d                                                                                          i
                                                                                                                    )
!
j            077        a                                                                                          l
                                                                                                                    '
3
!!
,            078          a
i                                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                                    i
:            079          d
                                                                                                                    :
                                                                                                                    )
4
-
              080        b                                                                                        i
j                                                                        Page 4 of 5
4
                                                                                                                    ,
<
 
          RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY
          SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97) ,
081  c
082  h
083  h                                  ;
                                          I
084  h
085- c
086  c
087  c
088  a
089  a
090  d
091  a
092  a                                  i
                                          !
093  d
                                          l
094  a                                  i
095  c                                  I
                                          i
096  c
097  c
098    b
099    b
  100  b
                        Page 5 of 5
                      .
 
        RIVER BEND
  SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR
  NRC WRITTEN EXAMINATION
,
i
:
1
  RESTRICTED INFORMATION
      OFFICIAL USE ONLY
 
                                                                                            !
          RIVER BEND SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR NRC EXAMINATION
                                                                                            l
                                FACILITY: River Bend                                        i
                          REACTOR TYPE: BWR-GE6
                  DATE ADMINISTERED: 01/27/97
                              CANDIDATE:
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE:
Use the supplied answer sheet for documentation ofyour answers. There are 100 multiple
choice questions on this examination, each worth 1.00 point. Passing grade for this
examination consists of an overall score of 80%. Examination papers will be picked up
four (4) hours after the examination begins.
                          100
                  TOTAL POINTS        CANDIDATE'S SCORE            PERCENT
                                                                                            :
All work on this examination is my own. I have neither given nor received aid.
        Candidate's Signature
                                                                                            1
                                                                                            i
              .                      -            . . - .    . - .                  -- .
 
                NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS
During the administration of this examination, the following rules apply:
1.  Cheating on the examination will result in a denial of your application and could result  J
    in more severe penalties.
                                                                                              1
2 After you complete the examination, sign the statement on the cover sheet indicating        l
    that the work is your own and you have not received or given assistance in completing    l
    the examination.
3 To pass the examination, you must achieve a grade of 80 percent or greater.
4 The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question
    number.
5. There is a time limit of 4 hours for completing the examination.
6. Use only black ink or dark pencil to ensure legible copies.
                                                                                              I
7. Print your name in the blank provided on the examination cover sheet and on all
      answer sheet pages.
                                                                                              !
8.    Mark your answers on the answer sheet provided and do not leave any question blank.    l
                                                                                              1
9.    If the intent of a question is unclear, ask questions of the examiner only.
10. Restroom trips are permitted, but only one applicant at a time will be allowed to leave.
      Avoid all contact with anyone outside the examination room to eliminate even the
      appearance or possibility of cheating.
I 1. When you complete the examination, assemble a package including the examination
      questions, examination aids, and answer sheets and give it to the examiner or proctor.
      Remember to sign the statement on the examination cover sheet.
12. After you have turned in your examination, leave the examination area as defmed by
      the examiner.
 
                                                              _
i
  I        QUESTION:
  Following Classification of an Emergency Event, what are the time interval guidelines for
  making NOTIFICATIONS to State and Local Authorities of the emergency
  classification?
  Notification must be made:
          a.  immediately.
          b. within 15 minutes.
          c. within 30 minutes.
          d. within 60 minutes.
  2        QUESTION:
  SELECT the conditions under which the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) may
  concurrently fill the Shift Technical Advisor (STA) position.
  The CRS may fill the STA position:
          a. provided that he remains in the main Control Room.
          b. while in Modes 1,2 and 3 if the Operations Shift Superintendent remains in
                the Main Control Room.
          c.    only when the plant is operating imder steady state conditions NOT requiring
                the Administrative CRS to be stationed.
            d. provided that there are a total of five (5) licensed operators currently on shift.
 
                                .  ..    .  .
                              .
  3      QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
          - The plant is shutdown for a refueling and maintenance outage
          - A Senior Reactor Operator licensed individual has been working more than 12-
            hours per day during his off-shift days coordinating procedure changes for the
            outage plant modifications
          - He is scheduled to retum to shift Saturday at 6:00am as the dayshift Control
              Room Supervisor
  What is the LATEST time he may work on the Friday before he takes the shift as CRS?
  ( Assume that he has not exceeded any overtime restrictions.)                                i
          a.  10:00pm
          b. 6:00pm
          c.  2:00pm
          d. 6:00am
  4      QUESTION:
  A currently licensed Senior Reactor Operator (SRO) has started wearing glasses.
    Which of the following individuals is responsible for ensuring the proper notifications are )
    made to the NRC regarding modifying the SRO's license?                                      l
            a. The Senior Reactor Operator
            b. The Operations Superintendent
            c. The General Manager, Plant Operations
            d. The Manager, Training
                              .
l
l
 
5      QUESTION:
Which of the fcilowing permission / notification requirements must be met for an
INTENTIONAL entry into Tech Spec 3.0.3?
Permission must be obtained from the:
        a.    Operations Superintendent and the NRC Resident Inspector notified,
        b. General Manager - Plant Operations and the NRC Resident inspector notified.
        c.    Manager - Operations and a 1-hour report made to the NRC.
        d. General Manager - Plant Operations and a 4-hour report made to the NRC.
6      QUESTION:
Given the folcwving conditions:
        - Testing is in progress that requires use of a Human Tag
        - It is anticipated that the test will require 5 more hours for completion
        - Current time is 4:00pm
flow much longer may this Human Tag continue?
        a.    Ihour
          b. 2 hours
          c. 4 hours
          d. 5 hours
 
  _ . _ _ _    . _ _ _          _      -_ _ _ _      __ . _ _ . _ . _ .  __ _ ._._.._. .._ _.    __. _ _ _ _ _ .
            7        QUESTION:
            Given the following information for a fully qualified, male River Bend radiation worker:
.
                      - 1997 Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) at River Bend as of 05/15/97 is
I                        550 mrem
                      - This individual spent 5 weeks in March and April of this year (1997) at the
l
I                        Clinton Power Station
                      - River Bend Radiation Protection has not yet received his radiation exposure
                          information from Clinton
L
,
i          What is the MAXIMUM Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) that he can receive at
            River Bend for the remainder of 1997 WITilOUT any additional approvals?                                  ,
<
                                                                                                                    '
                      a.    1450 mrem
                        b. 1950 mrem
                        c. 2000 mrem
                        d. 2500 mrem
l
l
l
1
i
{
>
 
- -                          _- . ..        ..      .. - - .      . . - -  -.        .  - - . . . . - ..
                                                                                                            l
    8      QUESTION:                                                                                        ,
    Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                              i
          - The plant is operating at 95% power                                                              1
          - A VALID high reactor pressure condition has just occurred                                        i
                                                                                                              I
          - The reactor did NOT scram
                                                                                                            !
                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                              1
    The At-The-Controls Operator should
          a.  infonn the Control Room Supervisor of the condition and insert a manual
                reactor scram when ordered.
            b. not insert a manual reactor scram unless the high pressure condition is
                sustained.
            c.  insert a manual reactor scram and inform the Control Room Supervisor of the                  i
                                                                                                              I
                condition and action taken.
            d. perform an immediate power reduction to reduce pressure below the high                        l
                pressure scram setpoint as soon as possible.
 
                              _  _.      . _        - - _  .    .  ._ _      _    _      _ -
  9      QUESTION:
                                                                                                  ,
  Given the following conditions:
          - The plant is operating at 100% power
          - It has just been discovered that a weekly surveillance was not accomplished
            within its specified frequency.
                                                                                                  -
          - It should have been completed three (3) days ago
  Which of the following describes the requirements regarding the associated equipment's
  Operability status?
                                                                                                    l
  The equipment:
          a.    may be considered to be Operable for the surveillance grace period (1.75 days)
                to allow the surveillance to be performed.
          b. may be considered to be Operable for a maximum period of 24 hours to allow
                the surveillance to be performed.
          c.  must have a Safety Function Operability Determination performed within 6
                hours.
          d. must be declared Inoperable immediately but may be retumed to service for
                performance of the surveillance.                                                  ;
!
l
t
s'
1
4
.
 
                      _      __    __    .- _-      ____. . - _          _      __  .
l
l
                                                                                          1
                                                                                          l
  10    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
!                                                                                        i
l        - The plant is shutdown with all rods fully inserted                            j
                                                                                          '
        - Shutdown cooling is in service with a reactor temperature of 230 *F
        - The Operations Shift Superintendent (OSS) has been scheduled to attend a 30    !
i
I
            minute outage meeting outside the Main Control Room
!                                                                                        i
! Which of the following describes how the control room command function may be          I
                                                                                          !
  maintained during this meeting?
                                                                                          ;
        a.  The OSS may turnover the command function to the Unit Operator or At-The-
              Controls Operator,
        b. If he is no further than 10 minutes from the Main Control Room the OSS may
              retain the command function.                                                ;
1
!
        c. The OSS must turnover the command function to another individual with a
              Senior Reactor Operators license.                                          i
        d. The Administrative Control Room Supervisor (with an inactive license) may
              assume the command function once the plant is less than 200 F.
                                                                                          l
  11    QUESTION:
  EQUIPMENT OUT OF SERVICE signs should be placed next to:
          a.  automatic initiation pushbutton(s) for an out of service system.
          b. controls for equipment required to be maintained operable,
          c.  equipment that is necessary for operation of out of service system.
          d. devices used to isolate the equipment out of service.
4
 
    . . . _ .              .      _
                                      . _ _ _ _        . _ _ _ . _ _ _____ ___ _            ___..    ______
i
                                                                                                              i
              12    QUESTION:                                                                                1
              Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                              i
                    - Preparations are in progress for a reactor and plant startup                          l
                    - All control rods are fully insened                                                    l
                      - Reactor coolant temperature is 192 F
                      - Both Recirculation Pumps are running in " slow" speed
              At what point in the startup process are the control board lineups for safety-related
              systems (OSP-0017) required to be perforrned?
                                                                                                              l
              The lineups shall be performed:
l                    a.  after the Mode Switch is placed in "Startup/ Hot Standby" but before control
                          rod withdrawals commence.
t
'
                      b. prior to reaching the point of adding heat with reactor power.                      j
                      c.  prior to reactor coolant temperature exceeding 200 F                                j
                                                                                                              i
                                                                                                              l
                      d. at the same time the Administrative Control Room Supervisor is stationed.            i
                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                              4
                                                                                                              I
l              13      QUESTION:
,
              Following the decision to implement AOP-0031," Shutdown From Outside The Main
i              Control Room", where must the Operations Shift Superintendent report?
                      a.  Division I Remote Shutdown Panel
                      b. Division 11 Remote Shutdown Panel
i
                      c. Operations Suppon Center
l
l                      d. Technical Support Center
l
:
1
;
  i
 
                                                        .    -
  14      QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
                                                                                              ;
          - A loss of coolant accident has occurred                                            '
          - Fuel damage is suspected but has not yet been confirmed
          - The emergency response organization has been activated and the State and local
              authorities have been notified
  Which of the following meets the definition of a ' release" for the purposes of offsite
  notifications?
                Any monitored plant effluent path is at its higit alarm setpoint.            j
          a.
          b. Two or more monitored plant effluent paths are at least three (3) times their
                normal readings.
          c. The fuel damage has been confirmed by reactor coolant sampling.
          d. A release is detected using radiation monitoring teams with portable monitors.
                                                                                                1
  15      QUESTION:
                                                                                                l
  During performance of flow balance surveillance testing on the Normal Service Water
                                                                                              I
  System, several valves that are normally full open need to be throttled for the duration of
  the test.
  Which of the following describes how the change in status of these valve will be tracked?
            a.  The throttle valve computerized listing will be updated and a Change Notice
                  (CN) for the valve realignment will be completed for SOP-0018," Normal
                  Service Water".
            b. A Procedure Revision for the valve realignment will be completed for SOP-
                  0018," Normal Service Water" and an entry made in the Control Room log.
              c. The repositioning of the valves will be documented per the guidance in ADM-
'
                  0022," Conduct of Operations".
J
              d. The repositioning of the valves will be controlled by tracking all
                  manipulations as required in the surveillance test package.
l
l
i
 
                                                                                                l
16      QUESTION:
Which of the following describes how an independent verification is perfonned on a              l
                                                                                                !
valve that is already " locked open" per a valve lineup?
The independent verifier shall:
        a.  verify the locking device is in place as required.
        b. remove the locking device, verify the valve is fully open and reinstall the
              locking device.
        c. attempt to move the valve in the " closed" direction to verify the locking
              devic > bnlds the valve open.
        d. have another individual verify the position and then verify the locking device
              installed.
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                >
17      QUESTION:
Which of the following controls are required when a freeze seal is being utilized as an
isolation point for a scheduled maintenance activity?
          a. A Dedicated Operator from Operations shall be stationed at the freeze seal to
                monitor it and to isolate the system should the seal fail.
          b. An Operator Aid Caution Tag shall be posted in the Main Control Room on
                the system being isolated by the freeze seal.
          c.    A Danger - Hold tag shall be hung at the freeze seal location prior to the seal
                being established.
          d. The Operations Shift Superintendent shall brief the operating crew on the
                freeze seal, including contingency actions should the freeze seal fail.
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                !
                                                                                                l
 
  . .        _-              ..    .              ..      .      .
      18        QUESTION:
      The plant is was initially operating at 100% power. A transient occurred resulting in the
      following conditions:
                        -RPV level is 36 inches and stable
                        -Reactor power is 74% and stable
                        -Total core flow is 50.5 E6 lbm/hr. and stable
      The cause of this plant configuration was the receipt of a signal from the:
                a.  EOC-RPT logic.
                b. recirculation pump cavitation interlock circuitry.
                c.  recirculatien flow control valve runback logic.
                d. ATWS/ARIlogic.
      19        QUESTION:
      Given the following conditions:
i
            - The High Pressure Core Spray (HPCS) system is operating and injecting into the
                reactor vessel following a valid initiation signal.
            - All Narrow Range Reactor Water Level Instrumentation has failed " UPSCALE"
l    Which of the following de ,cribrohe status of the HPCS system following the
      instrument failure?
.
                                                                                                l
t
'
                        HPCS Pump              Injection valve F004      Minimum Flow F012
                a.      Running                        Open                    Closed
                b.      Tripped                        Open                    Closed
                c.      Tripped                        Closed                  Open
                d.      Running                        Closed                  Open
                                                                                                !
                                                                                                ;
4
                                                                                                1
 
i
l
!
!  20      QUESTION:
!  Given the following conditions:
        - Due to a leak, drywell temperature is increasing
,
        - Conditions have exceeded the Safe Zone of the RPV Saturation Temperature
          Cune.
  Which of the following describes the availability of the Wide Range RPV water level
  indication?
                                                                                              I
  Wide Range level indication:
          a.  can be used for determination of actual RPV water level only if the indicator
              reads above its minimum indicated level.
          b. may be used for trending RPV water level changes but not for determination
                                                                                              l
              cf actual level
                                                                                              ,
          c. can be used for trending RPV water levels only if the indicator reads above its
              specified minimum indicated level.
          d. may not be used for either trending or for determination of RPV water level.
                                                                                              1
                                                                                              I
l
l
l
l
1
.
                                                                                              !
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              !
l.
 
    . ..                -  .  _ . _                    _      .    -    - ..    __        _ - . . - _ - .
                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                              l
      21    QUESTION:
                                                                                                              \
                                                                                                              l
      Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                              ,
            - A reactor startup is in progress                                                                1
            - Control rod 16-25 has just been withdrawn ONE notch (Notch I8 to 20)
            - The Rod Motion control " Withdraw" pushbutton on the Operator Control
                Module was used for the withdrawal
            - The Rod Control & Information System operated as designed during the                            i
                withdrawal                                                                                    f
      SELECT the point in the rod withdrawal sequence when the white " Settle" light would be                  l
                                                                                                              '
      expected to extinguish.
            a.    The Rod Motion control " Withdraw" pushbutton has just been released.                      l
                                                                                                              l
  .
              b. The hydraulic control unit withdraw exhaust directional control valve hasjust                i
                  closed.
              c.  The white "Out" light on the Rod Motion Matrix has just extinguished.                      I
              d. The control rod digital position display on the Core Map Display is
                  indicating "- "
?                                                                                                              .
                                                                                                              l
                                                                                                              l
,
:
d
                                                                                                              <
                                                                                                              J
          _              _
 
  .- -        .                  ..    -    -            , - _ - .  .    _ = .      __ - -. -
!
!      22    QUESTION:
      Given the following conditions:
              - The plant had been operating at 100% power
              - A severe over-pressure transient resulted m ALL Safety Relief Valves (SRV)
            -
                opening in the " relief" mode and then lifting in their " safety" mode
              - RPV pressure peaked at 1200 psig
              - All valves have closed (reseated) with the exception of one SRV that remains
                open in its " safety" mode
              - The required actions of AOP-0035," Safety Relief Valve Stuck Open", have
                been taken including scramming the reactor but the SRV has not closed.
      Which of the following describes the resulting tailpipe temperature trend as the plant
      cools down and depressurizes through the stuck open SRV? (Assume containment
      pressure is 0 psig and remains constant.)
      SRV tailpipe temperature will:
;            a.  start at 260 "F, rise to approximately 290 F and then will slowly fall
                  following reactor pressure during the depressurization below 500 psig.
                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                  l
              b. start at 525 F and will slowly fall following reactor pressure during the        l
                                                                                                  .
                  depressurization.
              c. start at 285 F, rise to approximately 325 *F and then will slowly fall
                  following reactor pressure during the depressurization below 500 psig.
              d. start at 305 F and will slowly fall following reactor pressure during the
                  depressurization.
l
l
l
                                                                                                  l
!
I
I
 
                                                            .
l
I
t
( 23      QUESTION
  Given the following conditions:
          - The plant has experienced a reactor scram and Main Steam Isolation Valve
            (MSIV) closure from 75% power
          - Reactor pressure control is by periodic operation of the Safety Relief Valves
                                                                                            J
              (SRV)
  Which of the following is an indication that one of the SRV tailpipe vacuum breakers      f
                                                                                            '
  has failed in the "OPEN" position during SRV operation?
          a.    An increase in indicated suppression pool water level each time the SRV
                opens.
          b. Direct pressurization of the containment each time the SRV opens.
          c.  Steam bypassing the SRV discharge quenchers with a direct piped path into
                the suppression pool.
          d. Suppression pool water being drawn up into the tailpipe after SRV closure.
  24      QUESTION:
  Suppression pool temperature is limited to 100*F during normal operations.
  Which of the following is an approved exception to this limit?
            a.  The limit maybe increased to 110 F with the MSIVs closed following a
                reactor scram (all control rods fully inserted).
            b. Suppression pool temperature is allowed to reach 110*F while testing RCIC
                during normal plant operations.
            c. The limit maybe increased above 120*F if reactor pressure is less than 300
                psig.
            d. Suppression pool temperature is allowed to reach 120*F after a Safety Relief
                  Valve actuation.
 
  _. _              __            _ _ _ . _ _____ . __ __ _ _ .        _  _  ..            . .
                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                  ;
      25    QUESTION:
                                                                                                  +
      Given the following conditions:
              - The plant is operating at 45% power
              - A VALID high steam flow signal is sensed in the "B" Main Steam Line
              - Steam flows in the remaining lines are nonnal
      Which of the following describes the expected AUTOMATIC response of the
      Containment And Reactor Vessel Isolation Control System (CRVICS) to this event?
              a.  A Group 6 (MSIV & MSL Drains) containment isolation signal will result.
              b. Only Channel"B" of the CRVICS MSIV isolation logic will de-energize.
              c.  One solenoid on ea:h MSIV will de-energize but no valve closures will occur.
              d. Only the inboard and outboard MSIVs in the "B" main steam line will close.
l
l
t
!
l
<
                                                                                        r
 
                    - - _                          .      .          .  _
                                                                                            l
I
  26      QUESTION:
1
                                                                                            i
l Given the following conditions:
          - The plant is performing a reactor and plant startup
          - Reactor power is 5.5 E4 counts per second (cps) on the Source Range
            Monitoring (SRM) instrumentation and is increasing
  Which of the following describes how a SRM detector that cannot be fully withdrawn
  affects continued control rod withdrawals? Assume the stuck SRM Channel is NOT
  bypassed.
  Control rod withdrawals will be possible:
          a.  because the control rod withdrawal block logic is one-out-of-two-taken twice
                for SRM detectors.
          b. as soon as the three fully withdrawn SRM detector power levels are all less
                than 100 cps.
          c.  until power reaches 1.0 E5 cps and then will not be allowed until associated
                IRM power is at or above Range 3.
          d. until power reaches 1.0 E5 cps and then will not be allowed until associated
                IRM power is at or above Range 8.
                                                                                            i
                                                                                            I
                                                                                            ,
  27      QUESTION:                                                                        !
  Follawing an actuation of Alternate Rod Insertion (ARI) from 100% power, how can the      '
  operator detennine if the actuation was " automatic" or " manual"?
  The operator should check the:
            a.  status of the Recirculation Pumps.
!          b. position of the backup scram valves.
            c.    final pressure in the scram air header.
            d. status of the ARI solenoid valves.
i
!
 
                                                                                  .    . - - -
                                                                                                l
28      QUESTION:
The "B" Standby Liquid Control (SLC) Squib Valve (F004B) continuity meter in P642 is            l
reading 4.95 milliamps.
                                                                                                1
What are the appropriate actions for these conditions?
        a.  Declare the "B" SLC system Inoperable as this current value ind: cates the
            squib ignitor has decomposed.
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                I
        b. Declare the "B" SLC system Inoperable as this current value '.ndicates the          j
            squib valve has fired.
        c. Take no action as this is the normal continuity current for the squib valve
            ignitor circuit.
        d. Direct troubleshooting of the "B" SLC system as the current should be no            ,
                                                                                                  '
            lower than 2 amps.
                                                                                                '
29      QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - All four Automatic Depressurization System (ADS) manual initiation
            pushbuttons have been armed, depressed, and released
        - No ADS valves opened
Which of the following describes what must now occur to open the ADS Safety Relief
Valves?
                                                                                                '
        a. The 105 second timer must time out.
        b. The 105 second timer must time out AND the ADS manualinitiation
              pushbuttons must be depressed again.
          c.  One low pressure ECCS pump per division must be started.
          d. One low pressure ECCS pump must be started AND the ADS manual
              initiation pushbuttons must be depressed again.
 
                              - .    _      .-    . , - -    . _ _ - ..          .        . . . - .
    30    QUESTION:
    Given the following conditions:
          - LPCS System Inoperative alarm has been received
          - The Low Pressure Core Spray (LPCS) Line Break status light (postage stamp) is
              illuminated
l
    Which of the following describes the location of the break?
    The break is in the:
l
l
          a.    Drywell between the LPCS Testable Check Valve (F006) and the LPCS
                  Injection Valve (F005).
l          b. reactor pressure vessel downcomer area.
,
            c.    Auxiliary Building between the LPCS Testable Check Valve (F006) and the
                  LPCS Injection Valve (F005).
1
'
            d. area inside the core shroud bypassing the Low Pressure Core Spray sparger.
                                                                                                      i
I
l
l
.
:
  ;
                                        -,.                                          . . - .
 
                                                                          .            - ._
  31    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
          - The Low Pressure Core Spray (LPCS) system is running in the test return to the
            suppression pool mode
          - A leak has caused drywell pressure to increase to 1.95 psig
          - Reactor water level is -62 inches
          - Reactor pressure is 750 psig
  Select the expected AUTOMATIC response of the LPCS system.
          a.  The LPCS Pump trips, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012)
              closes, the pump restarts and the Injection Isolation Valve (F005) opens.
          b. The Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012) closes and the LPCS
                Pump continues to run on minimum flow.
          c.  The LPCS Pump trips, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012)
                closes, the pump restarts and runs on minimum flow.
,
          d. The LPCS Pump continues to run, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool
                (F012) closes and the Injection isolation Valve (F005) opens.
;
  32      QUESTION:
  Which of the following describes how the Residual Heat Removal (RHR) Heat
  Exchanger Bypass Valves (F048A & B) should be positioned after an ECCS initiation
  signal?
  F048A & B should be:
                                                                                              I
            a.  overridden and closed if suppression pool temperature reaches 100 *F and
                EOP-2," Primary Containment Control" is entered.
            b. overridden and closed once full injection flow has been established.
            c.  closed as directed by the Emergency Operating Procedures 10 minutes after
                the initiation signal.
            d. left open to provide maximum Low Pressure Coolant Injection (LPCI) flow.
 
33    QUESTION:
Which of the items below describes the response of the Rod Control and Information
System when the DRIFT TEST pushbutton is depressed at the Operator Control Module
(OCM)?
When the DRIFT TEST pushbutton is depressed:
      a.  red LED drift lights will lite for all rods not at a latched position.
      b. a drift signal will be generated for the selected control rod.
      c.  an artificial drift condition will be induced when the selected rod is moved.
      d. the drift circuitry will be verified operable by initiating a drift alarm.
                                                                                        l
                                                                                        !
 
          ..    -          . _ -    -.  .      - - - - _ - . _      .      - - -. . .-
l
  34    QUESTION:
l Given the following conditions:
l
l
        - The llPCS Diesel Generator had been in a normal standby lineup
        - An automatic start signal hasjust been received
        - The diesel generator has responded as designed
        - it has been determined that NO VALID start signal condition exists
  What are the required IMMEDIATE actions for these conditions?
        a.    Depress the local panel Emergency Stop pushbutton and place the Engine
              Mode Control Switch in " TEST".
        b. Depress the Main Control Room Emergency Stop pushbutton and direct the
              local operator to place the Engine Mode Control switch in "MAINT".
          c.  Place the Diesel Generator Mode Switch to " LOCAL MANUAL" and direct
              the local operator to place the Diesel Generator Control switch to "STOP".
          d. Verify the Diesel Generator Mode Switch in " REMOTE MANUAL" and
              place the Main Control Room Diesel Generator Control switch to "STOP"
l
l
i
 
                                                                _
                                      .
                        .
                                                                              .
                              _.
                                                                                            l
                                                                                            '
l
                                                                                            \
  35    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:                                                          ;
                                                                                            l
        - A 4160 V ITE type breaker was racked in following maintenance on its
            associated pump                                                                j
        - The breaker is currently closed
        - A loss of DC control power to that breaker occurs
        - No operator actions are taken
  Which of the following describes the operational capabilities of this breaker?
        a.  The breaker cannot be remotely operated but can be locally tripped, then
              closed and tripped open one more time.
          b. The breaker will trip open on loss of control power and all additional breaker
              operations must be performed locally.                                        :
          c.  The breaker will trip open on loss of control power and no further breaker
              operations are possible.
          d. The breaker cannot be remotely operated but can be locally tripped one time
              with no further operation possible.
!
;
l
.
 
                      ___              _ .      _      __- _ ._          __            _
l
'
!
!  36    QUESTION:
l
  Gisen the following conditions:
l
1
          - The plant is operating at 95% power
          - The "B" EllC Pressure Regulator is in " TEST"
;        - The "A" EHC Pressure Regulator output has failed "AS-IS"
l
          - The At-The-Controls Operator begins a power reduction using recirculation
              now
    Which of the following would be the expected response of EHC for this failure?
          a.  The Maximum Combined Flow Limiter will limit the magnitude of the
                pressure error signal generated as power decreases.
          b. The Turbine Control Valves will open attempting to maintain the selected
                pressure setpoint as reactor power and pressure decrease.
          c.    The Maximum Combined Flow Limiter will close the Main Turbine Bypass
                Valves to control pressure at the setpoint,
          d. The Turbine Control Valves will not move, however, turbine load will
                decrease as reactor pressure follows the power reduction
    37      QUESTION:
    Which of the following plant systems is required to be Operable to support the
    Operability requirements of Secondary Containment?
            a.    Combustible Gas Control
            b. Standby Gas Treatment System
            c.  Penetration Valve And Main Steam Isolation Valve-Leakage Control Systems
!            d. Leak Detection System
.
 
                                                                                        1
38      QUESTION:
The Average Power Range Monitoring (APRM) Gain Adjustment Factor (GAF) value for
APRM Channel "B" is 0.989, with Core Thermal Power at 100%.
Select the current condition of this APRM channel and the appropriate actions for that
condition.
        a.  Actual power is greater than indicated power and a GAF adjustment is
            required.                                                                  )
                                                                                        i
                                                                                        I
        b. A conservative condition exists but a GAF adjustment is required.
        c. Indicated reactor power is greater than actual power and a GAF adjustment is
              NOT required.
        d. A non-conservative condition exists but GAF adjustment is NOT required.
39      QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - The High Pressure Cr. 5 pray (HPCS) system is running in the CST to CST      ,
            mode                                                                        l
                                                                                        l
        - While the pump is running an i&C Technician's error results in a low CST
                                                                                        j
            water level signal                                                          l
                                                                                        l
  Which of the following PREVENTS pumping suppression pool water into the CST for
  these conditions?
          a. The HPCS Pump will trip as soon as the Suppression Pool Suction Valve
              (F015) begins to open with HPCS in the CST to CST mode.
          b. The HPCS low CST water level automatic swap to the suppression pool is
              overridden with HPCS in the CST to CST mode.
          c. The operator must take immediate action to close the Test Bypass Valve To
                CST (F010) and Test Return Valve To CST (F011).
          d. The Test Bypass Valve To CST (F010) and Test Return Valve To CST (F0ll)
                both close as the Suppression Pool Suction Valve (F015) begins to open.
 
    _        . ..                      ..                    -              ._        ..  . . .
                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                    '
'
  40      QUESTION:
  A turbine load set runback will NOT occur on a load reject if the plant is operating at or      l
  below 40%.                                                                                      ;
                                                                                                    !
                                                                                                    '
.
  SELECT the parameter used as input to the load reject circuitry for the determination of
                                                                                                    i
  plant power.
          a.      High pressure turbine exhaust pressure.
1
          b. High pressure turbine first stage pressure.
I
          c.      Main generator power output (MWe).
          d. Main generator current output (amps).
.
t
  41      QUESTION:                                                                                ;
  Prior to a startup with the plant in a cold, depressurized condition, the Unit Operator
  adjusts the Control Rod Drive Hydraulic (CRD) system Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to
  maintain 250 psid between drive water header pressure and reactor pressure.
                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                    ;
    How is this pressure differential maintained as reactor pressure increases during the
    ensuing startup to 100% power? (Assmn- the CRD system is operating as designed.)                l
                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                    I
    As reactor pressure increases during the startup:
            a. the Pressure Control Valve automatically operates to maintain CRD system
                  pressure above reactor pressure.
            b. the Unit Operator must periodically open the Pressure Control Valve to
                  maintain the required differential pressure.
            c.      the Flow Control Valve automatically opens to maintain a constant flow,
                    therefore a constant d/p across the PCV.                                        i
            d. the Unit Operator must periodically adjust the Flow Control Valve to maintain
                    CRD system pressure above reactor pressure.
                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                    !
 
                                                                                  ..    _ _ _
i
  42    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:                                                              .
                                                                                                ,
        - The plant is performing a scheduled shut 6mn
        - Intermediate Range Monitoring (IRM) cbnnel "H" has failed " UPSCALE" and
            has NOT been bypassed
  At what point would an automatic half scram be expected for these conditions?
                                                                                                ;
          a.  The plant enters Mode 2.
          b. APRM "H" reaches 5% power.
          c. The IRM detectors are fully inserted.
          d. Power has decreased to the Low Power Setpoint.
  43    QUESTION:
  Which of the following would be an indication of a DECREASE in the efficiency of the
  Offgas system catalytic recombiners?
                                                                                                  :
                                                                                                  ,
          a.  Main Condenser vacuum will decrease.                                              l
          b. Offgas recombiner temperatures will increase.
          c.  OfTgas system total flow volume will increase.
          d. Offgas system discharge radiation levels due to Nitrogen-16 will a3 crease.
I
'
                                                                                                  l
                                                                                                  i
l
I
i
I
 
                                            .      _                    _            ._. ..
                                                                                              !
  44      QUESTION:                                                                          l
  Given the following conditions:
                                                                                              1
-
            - The plant is operating at 50% power
            - The Main Seal Oil Pump has just tripped
            - The Emergency Seal Oil Pump did not start
  Which of the following describes the required actions for the above conditions?
:
.
            a.    An immediate generator and turbine trip is required.
                                                                                              i
            b. A rapid power reduction to less than 25% is required.
l
            c.  Begin load reduction for main generator purge.
"
            d. Hydrogen pressure should be reduced to approximately 40 psig.
                                                                                              !
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              '
    45      QUESTION:
    The following is the current Rod Control & Information System display data for control    l
                                                                                              '
    rod 28-25 that had been at Notch "48". (Note that the LEDs will illuminate /not
    illuminate when the appropriate switches are depressed, as required.)                      l
'          - FullIn:          Illuminated
          - Full Out:      NOT    Illuminated
4          - Drift:          Illuminated
          - Selected:        NOT liluminated
          - Accum Fault: NOT liluminated
          - Scram:          NOT Illuminated
,
    Which of the following has occurred?
              a.  The control rod was driven to Notch "00" using the " Insert" pushbutton.
              b. The Scram Outlet Valve (127) ONLY opened.
              c.  The Scram Inlet Valve (126) ONLY opened.
              d. BOTH the Scram inlet (126) and Outlet Valves (127) have opened.
 
                                                                                            l
                                                                                            l
                                                                                            l
46    QUESTION:
Which of the following is indication that a failure of both seals on one recirculation pump
have occurred?
      a.    Drywell identified leakage will decrease and unidentified leakage will        )
            increase.                                                                      l
        b. Drywell identified leakage will increase and unidentified leakage will
            increase.
        c.  Drywell identified leakage will increase and unidentified leakage will
            decrease.
        d. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and unidentified leakage will
            decrease.
                                                                                            l
47      QUESTION:
                                                                                            1
Given the following conditions:                                                            l
                                                                                            !
        - The plant is performing a reactor startup and heatup
        - Reactor water level control is via the Reactor Water Cleanup (RWCU) system
          rejecting to the main condenser
        - Main condenser vacuum has been established with the Mechanical Vacuum
            Pumps
Which of the following is the reason for limiting reject flowrate for these conditions?
Discharging water to the main condenser at a vacuum:
        a.  with excessive flowrates can exceed the design capacity of the mechanical
              vacuum pumps.
        b. may cause a RWCU pump trip due to high flowrates through the system.
        c. can exceed the Reactor Plant Component Cooling Water system heat removal
              capabilities for the non-regenerative heat exchanger,
          d. will cause damage to the filter-demin resin strainers and resin " channeling"
              from high flowrates.
 
                            - _ - _      .  _            __    . . _ _      .      _ _ _ _ . _ _ ._.
    48    QUESTION:
    Given the following conditions:
          - A plant startup is in progress
          - The main turbine is rolling at 1050 rpm with "1500" rpm selected at the
              " medium" starting rate                                                                  l
          - The At The-Controls Operator reports the acceleration rate of the turbine is
              approximately 180 rpm
    Which of the following describes the current main turbine /EHC operation?
,
            a.  A loss of both EHC speed signals has occurred.
            b. A loss of one of the EHC speed signals has occurred.
1
            c. The turbine is accelerating at the appropriate rate as selected by the speed
                control unit.
l
            d. The wobulator circuit is starting to vary acceleration rate as turbine speed
                  approaches 1500 rpm.
                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                        ;
                                                                                                        l
!                                                                                                        I
                                                                                                        '
,
  f
1
 
                                                                                              i
                                                                                              .
49    QUESTION:
                                                                                                l
Given the following conditions:
      - The plant is operating at 50% power
          Main Steam Isolation Valve (MSIV) partial stroke testing is in progress              !
      - The inboard MSIV on the "D" Main Steam Line (MSL)is being tested with the
          " TEST" pushbutton
      - While the MSIV is stroking in the closed direction, power is lost to the test
          solenoid
Which of the following describes how this MSIV will be affected?
The Inboard MSIV on the "D" MSL:
        a.  will immediately reopen with no operator action.
        b. can be reopened with the normal control switch,
        c.  will reopen over 4 minutes as the air bleeds off the top of the operating piston.
        d. will fully close and cannot be reopened until power is restored.
                                                                                                i
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                l
 
        -                  --                      . _ .  .          .                -    .-
I 50      QUESTION:
  The RilR S/D Cooling Isolation Valve Enable / Disable switch on the local panel (P001)
                                                                                                  '
  has two positions," Enable / Disable"
                                                                                                  -
  Which of the following describes when the switch is REQUIRED to be in " Disable" and
  the effect on the operation of Shutdown Cooling when it is in this position?
'
  The RHR S/D Cooling Isolation Valve Enable / Disable switch is placed in " Disable"
  when:
          a.  reactor pressure is greater than 135 psig and prevents operation of the RHR
                Shutdown Cooling Inboard Isolation Valve (F009) from the Main Control
                Room.
          b. reactor pressure is greater than 135 psig and prevents operation of the RHR
                Shutdown Cooling Outboard Isolation Valve (F008) from the Main Control
                Room.
          c.  evacuating the Main Control Room to allow local operation of the RHR
                Shutdown Cooling Inboard Isolation Valve (F009).
          d. evacuating the Main Control Room to allow local operation of the RHR
                Shutdown Cooling Outboard Isolation Valve (F008).
  51      QUESTION.                                                                              1
  Which of the following is normally cooled by the Reactor Plant Component Cooling
  Water system on the Recirculation Pump shaft seal packages?                                    ,
                                                                                                  l
                The reactor coolant leaking from the Recirculation System into the lower seal    ;
            a.
                                                                                                  1
                cavity via the breakdown bushmg.                                                  l
l
            b. The reactor coolant flow directed to the Drywell Equipment Drain Sump from
                the seal package.
!
            c. The Control Rod Drive Hydraulic System seal purge flow being injected into
l
i                the Recirculation Pump impeller cavity.
            d. The Control Rod Drive Hydraulic System seal purge flow being directed to
                  the Drywell Equipment Drain sump.
                                                                                                    l
!
1
!                                                                                                  ,
                                                                                                  '
I
I
 
                                      _-.          -              -                  -  _ _ - .-- -.
52    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
      - The plant is operating at 85% power
      - The At-The-Controls Operator has just depressed the " Transfer To LFMG"
          pushbuttons for transferring the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed
        - The Operator reports that the CB5A breaker opened but the CB5B breaker did
          NOT open
Which of the following describes the expected status of the Recirculation Pumps 20
seconds after this failure?
        a.  Both Recire Pumps will be coasting to a stop
        b. The "A" Recirc Pump will be running in " slow" speed, the "B" Recirc Pump
            will be running in " fast" speed.
        c.  The "A" Recire Pump will be running in " slow" speed, the "B" Recire Pump
            will be coasting to a stop.
        d. The "A" Recirc Pump will be coasting to a stop, the "B" Recire Pump will be
            running in " fast" speed.
53      QUESTION:                                                                                    I
Which of the following describes how the design and operation of the two backup scram
valves results in venting the scram air header?
        a.  Normally energized, one valve will deenergize with each RPS channel to vent              l
                                                                                                      l
              the scram air header.
          b. One valve is powered from each RPS trip channel with either valve energizing
              to vent the scram air header.
          c.  Both RPS channels must trip to deenergize either valve with both valves
              required to vent the scram air header.
          d. Both RPS channels must trip to energize either valve with only one valve
              required to vent the scram air header.
 
                    . _ . -                      _-      _  _    __ _    _              _  _ . .
$                                                                                                    )
                                                                                                    l
  54    QUESTION:
  SELECT the method by which reactivity insertion rate is regulated for control rod
  withdrawals and insertions.
  Reactivity insertion rate is controlled by:
                                                                                                    '
          a.  automatically varying the position of the Control Rod Drive Hydraulic
              Pressure Control Valve.
"
          b. throttling the water flow entering and leaving the under-piston area of the
              drive mechanism.                                                                      j
          c.  automatically varying the operating position of the Control Rod Drive
              Hydraulic Flow Control Valve.                                                        i
                                                                                                    I
                                                                                                    '
          d. throttling the water flow entering and leaving the over-piston area of the drive
                                                                                                    i
              mechanism.
  55      QUESTION
  One of the concerns with maintaining proper reactor water level in the steam separators
  during plant operation is to minimize "carryunder".
  Which of the following would result if excessive "carryunder" were occurring?
          a.  Core thermal power would decrease.                                                  ,
          b. Core differential pressure would decrease.                                            l
                                                                                                    1
          c.  Overall plant efficiency would increase.
            d. Jet pump net positive suction head would increase.
 
      .-- .        -..__ .        -. -            . -      ... - . - - . - .- - - -          .-
56    QUESTION
Given the following conditions:
        . The plant is shutdown for refueling
        - The "A" Residual Heat Removal (RHR) loop is being placed in the Fuel Pool
            Cooling Assist mode on the containment (upper) pools
Which of the following prevents draining the upper containment pools to the suppression
pool via the RHR Minimum Flow To Suppression Pool Valve (F064A) when starting the
"A" RHR Pump?
        a. The RHR pump will trip if a flowpath to the upper pools is not established
              within 8 seconds.
        b. F064 A is overridden closed by the operator during the start of the RHR pump.
        c.    The operator must establish flow to the upper poo!s before the F064A valve
                automatically opens.
        d. The F064A valve is isolated and tagged closed during the Fuel Pool Cooling
                Assist lineup.
57      QUESTION:
A loss of power has just occurred to one of the solenoids for an Main Steam Isolation
Valve (MSIV).
Which of the following describes the response of the MSIV and the reason for that
response?
  The MSIV will:
            a.  close because the solenoids energize to align the air supply to open the MSIV.
                                                                                                  :
            b. remain open because the other solenoid continues to supply air to the MSIV.        !
                                                                                                  !
            c. close because the solenoids are in series and either one deenergizing will vent
                the air supply to the MSIV.
            d. remain open because the instrument air accumulator for that MSIV continues
                                                                                                  !
                  to supply air to the actuator.
                                                                                                  !
                                                                                                  !
 
58      QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - The plant is operating at 100% power
        - Feedwater level control is in " automatic" with Narrow Range Level "A"
            selected
        - The "A" Narrow Range channel has just failed "DOWNSCALE"
        - No operator actions are taken
SELECT the cause of the subsequent reactor scram.
        a.  Reactor vessel high water level
        b. Main Steam isolation Valve closure
        c.  Reactor vessel low water level
        d. APRM high thermal power
59      QUESTION:
Following a normal reactor scram, at what point must the At-The-Controls Operator be
alert for narrow range reactor water level indication " outgassing" or " notching"?
(Assume the Reference Leg Backfill system is NOT in service.)
          a.  If the cooldown rates exceed the Technical Specification limits.
          b. If the MSIVs close and pressure control is on the Safety Relief Valves.
          c.  When the last Feed Pump is removed from service.
          d. As reactor pressure decreases below 450 psig.
 
      - -    .      --        ,- . .-        - .      - -- . - .. - - . - - -                - ._- .
          60      QUESTION:
          Given the following conditions:
                  - The plant is shutdown for refueling                                                  ,
                  - The inclined Fuel Transfer System (IFTS) cart has just been loaded with two
                      fuel bundles and is .still in the upper fuel transfer pool
                  - A steadily decreasing water level is occurring in the refueling cavity              i
          Which of the following describes what should be done with the fuel on the IFTS cart in        ,
          order to place it in a safe position?
                  a. The cart should be left where it is with a source of makeup water supplied to
                        the transfer tube within 30 minutes.
                  b. The cart should be sent to the lower fuel transfer pool.
                                                                                                        t
                  c.    Open the IFTS Flapper Valve such that makeup water to the upper fuel
                        transfer pool will be supplied to the cart.                                      l
                  d. The fuel should be removed and placed in the upper fuel pool storage racks.
l
l
l
l
a
!
1
  - -
 
                ...    -_~    -          . . _ _ - - .        .              .    ..  - ..
  61    QUESTION:
'
  Given the following conditions:
        - The plant had been operating at 100% power for several days
        - A combination of problems has resulted in the loss of ALL high pressure feed
            capabilities with the exception of the Reactor Core Isolation Cooling (RCIC)
            system which automatically initiated
        - It has been 2 minutes since the reactor scrammed
        - Pressure control is on the main turbine bypass valves
  Which of the following describes the proper response of RCIC for these conditions?          ;
  RCIC is running with a discharge pressure of:                                              l
          a.  1010 psig, pump flow of 600 gpm and reactor water level is decreasing.
          b. 1030 psig, pump flow of 400 gpm and reactor water level is rising.
                                                                                              !
          c.  940 psig, pump flow of 120 gpm and the Minimum Flow To Suppression Pool
              valve (F019)is open.
          d. 1200 psig, turbine speed of 4250 rpm and the Minimum Flow To Suppression
              Pool valve (F019)is open.
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              I
                                                                                              I
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              l
 
                                      _        -  . -.          _      _ _        _  . . _ ,
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                !
62    (JUESTION:
                                                                                                l
Given the following conditions:
      - The Main Control Room has been evacuated due to a fire
      - All immediate actions were attempted prior to leaving the Main Control Room
          however the shutdown status of the reactor could not be determined prior to
          evacuation
                                                                                                l
      - Control of the plant has been established at the Remote Shutdown Panel
Which of the following must the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) use to make the
decision to enter EOP-1 A,"RPV Control - ATWS" for these conditions?
The decision will be based upon:
        a.  the Reactor Building Operator's report on the status of the Scram Inlet and
            Outlet Valves on the HCUs.
        b. monitoring reactor water level trend versus the number and type ofinjection
            systems operating.
        c. the rate at which Suppression Pool temperature rises due to Safety Relief            ,
            Valve cycling.
        d. an estimate of reactor power from the number of Safety Relief Valves cycling
            versus time after the scram.
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                \
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                !
                                                                                                1
 
  . - . .          -.    -. .        _.    -.          -.      --            .      _          _- -
                                                                                                      ;
                                                                                                      l
                                                                                                      i
                                                                                                      i
          63    QUESTION:                                                                            f
                                                                                                      i
          Given the fbliowing conditions:                                                              ,
                                                                                                      !
                - The plant had been operating at 75% power
                - A loss of feedwater occurred
!                - The Main Steam Isolation Valves closed on a level spike below -143 inches          -
                - Reactor water level decreased to -50 inches and is now +30 inches                  :
                - All expected automatic actions occurred
                                                                                                      l
          Upon resetting the scram, the At-The-Controls Operator received all eight (8) RPS Scram      ,
          SOV lights, however, the Scram Discharge Volume (SDV) Vent and Drain Valves do              .
          NOT indicate "open".                                                                        7
                                                                                                      i
          SEl.ECT the reason for the SDV Vent and Drain valves remaining closed.                      ,
                a.    The SDV high water level scram signal is still present.
                                                                                                      ,
                b. The Alternate Rod Insertion Valves are still open.                                  l
                c. The Reactor Mode Switch is still in " Shutdown"                                    ;
                                                                                                      :
                  d. The EOP-0005, Enclosure 12 (Defeating RPS & ARI Logic Trips) switches            j
                      are still in " Emergency".                                                      ,
                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                        i
                                                                                                        !
                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                        l
 
  . _      _                                ._ _          .    . __      _
      64      QUESTION:
      Given the following conditions:
              - The plant is operating at 30% power                                              l
              - Suppression pool cooling is in service
              - The surveillance test for manual operation of the Safety Relief Valves (SRV)is
                  in progress
              - During the surveillance, suppression pool temperature reached 103 F
      Which of the following are the requirements concerning entry into/ implementation of
      EOP-2," Primary Containment Control"?
              a.  The SRV surveillance procedures allow 4 hours to reduce suppression pool
                    temperature below 100 F before EOP-2 entry is required.
              a.    EOP-2 may be deferred for 24 hours while suppression pool temperature is
                    reduced to less than 100 F.
              c.    Technical Specifications modify the Emergency Operating Procedure limit to
                    105 F while surveillance testing to the suppression pool is occurring.
                                                                                                l
                                                                                                I
              d. The actions of EOP-2 are required to be performed as soon as suppression
                    pool temperature is above 100 'F.
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                i
                                                                                                i
      65      QUESTION:
      Injecting boron before exceeding the Boron Injection Initiation Temperature (BIIT) will  i
      ensure that the suppression pool temperature will not:
                a. exceed 160'F.
                b. exceed the Heat Capacity Temperature Limit (HCTL).
t
!              c.    reach the point of adversely affecting low pressure ECCS pump net positive
                      suction head.
l
                d. be heated to the point that drywell pressure increases solely due to high
                      suppression pool temperatures.
I
l
,
 
                            . _ _ . -    .    .                .                        _  _ .
                                                                                                  l
                                                                                                  !
    66    QUESTION:
    Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                  l
                                                                                                  !
                                                                                                  '
            - The plant is operating at 100% power
            - Offgas Building area radiation levels are rising
            - Offgas Building and Main Plant Vent Stack effluent radiation levels are rising
            - Offgas hydrogen concentration is 5%
            - Actions are being directed to reduce hydrogen concentration in Offgas to less
              than 4%
    Which of the following is the reason why the operator is NOT allowed to place the
    standby recombiner in service to reduce hydrogen concentrations to less than 4%?
    Placing the standby Offgas recombiner in service:                                            l
                                                                                                  !
            a.  may exceed the capacity of the preheater reducing temperatures to the level
l
                  where recombination will stop,
            b. could reduce the flow rate when the service air purge is initiated.
.
l
            c.  may cause a loss of main condenser vacuum resciting in an MSIV closure if
                  the plant is still at power.
              d. could provide the ignition source for the hydrogen already present.
f
l
l
t
  c
J
  4
 
67      QUESTION:
                                                                                        ,
Given the following conditions:
        - The plant had been operating at 100% power                                    j
        - A loss of off-site power with diesels failing to start (Station Blackout) has  l
          occurred                                                                      .
        - All automatic actions have occurred and all immediate operator actions have    ;
            been taken                                                                    l
                                                                                          l
Which of the following is the concern with long term operation of the Reactor Core      j
isolation Cooling (RCIC) system under these conditions?
                                                                                          !
                                                                                        I
RCIC operation during a station blackout will be limited:
        a.    by the system isolation on equipment space high temperatures.
        b. by the cooling water being supplied to the RCIC lube oil cooler.
        c.  by turbine exhaust backpressure as the suppression pool reaches saturation
              conditions.
        d. by the automatic isolation on low steam supply pressure as the reactor
              depressurizes.
                                                                                          i
 
  __ . . . .    _ _ _ . .        _    ._      . . _ _ . _ _ .  .._  _ . _ _  _ -    . _ _ .  __    _ _ _ . . . ._
                                                                                                                        ,
                                                                                                                        '
i
                                                                                                                        l
            68                                                                                                        l
                          QUESTION:
                                                                                                                        ;
            Given the following conditions:                                                                            l
                                                                                                                        I
                          - A reactor scram with Main Steam isolation Valve (MSIV) closure from 90%
                            power has occurred
                          - ADS air is not available to the Safety Relief Valves (SRV)                                  :
                          - EOP-1. "IU)V Control" requires maintaining the cooldown rate less                          l
                            than 100 F/hr                                                                              l
                          - The EOP directs depressurization by " sustained" SRV opening
                                                                                                                        :
            Which of the following is the direction the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) should                            l
            provide to the Unit Operator regarding " sustained" SRV opening?                                          j
                                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                                        l
            The SRVs should be:
                          a. opened and maintained open until the reactor is depressurized or until air
                              pressure is no longer available.
                          b. opened and maintained open to obtain pressure reductions equivalent to 100
                              *F before shutting.
                          c. opened to obtain a rapid pressure reduction to 450 psig and then placed in
                              " Automatic".
                          d. opened to obtain pressure reductions in increments of 100 psig until the
                              reactor is depressurized.
                                                                                                                        1
 
69    QUESTION:
The bases for the Maximum Core Uncovery Time Limit curve:
      a.  is the time limitation for a reactor water level indication response once all
            injection is stopped and adequate core cooling is assured.
      b. is the time the core may be partially covered and steam cooling ensures the
            hottest fuel rod temperature will not exceed 1800*F.
      c.  is the time reactor level may be below the bottom of active fuel with no
            cooling and the hottest fuel rod clad temperature not exceeding 1500 F
      d. provides time limitations on the operator to complete RPV flooding prior to
            exiting this procedure and entering EOP-4, " Primary Containment Flooding"
70    QUESTION:
Assuming the affected control rods are not physically stuck, which of the following
Alternate Control Rod Insertion methods will be most effective for rod insertion without
regard to the cause of a failure to scram (ATWS)?
        a.  Deenergize the scram solenoids
        b. Vent the scram air header
        c. Vent the CRD overpiston volume
        d. Reset the scram and initiate a manual scram
 
      -    ...        .  -  -- . -    = - - . -    . - .    . - - - -              - . . _ . . - _ _ _ -
                                                                                                              .
                                                                                                              i
                                                                                                              !
  71      QUESTION:
  The plant is performing an Emergency Depressurization from normal operating pressure.
  Only three (3) Safety Relief Valves (SRV) can be opened.
                                                                                                              1
                                                                                                              I
  Which of the following restrictions / limitations control the opening of the Main Steam
  lsolation Valves (MSIV) to assist in the depressurization?
                                                                                                              l
  The MSIVs:
          a.    should not be opened if the Tech Spec cooldown rate limits will be exceeded.
          b. should not be opened if the cause of the isolation was high steam line
                radiation levels.
,
          c. may be opened irrespective of any suspected fuel failure or steam line brenk.
!
;        d. may be opened only if the differential pressure across the valves can be
!                reduced to less than 50 psid.
l
r
i
I
l
!
                                                                                                              ;
                                                                                                              i
l
,
4
 
72    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
      - The plant had been operating at 100% power
      - The "A" lleater Drain Pump has tripped and the "B" Heater Drain Pump is
          NOT available
      - Reactor power is slowly increasing
SELECT the power reduction REQUIRED for these conditions.
Power should be reduced to:
        a.  70%.
        b. 75%.
        c.    80%.
        d. 90%.
73      QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - A loss of coolant accident has occurred
        - All plant systems have responded as designed
        - Conditions are such tic'. Emergency Containment Venting is required by EOP-
            2," Primary Containment Control"
  Which of the following systems is REQUIRED to be available to perform this venting?
          a. Annulus Pressure Control
          b. Drywell/ Containment Purge Supply
          c.  Hydrogen Mixing
          d. flydrogen Purge
 
  74    GllESTION:
  SEl.ECT the reason why terminating and preventing injection during a failure-to-scram
  ( ATWS) transient results in a power reduction.
  Tenninating and preventing injection:
        a.  results in increased core inlet subcooling as feed preheating is decreased.
          b. increases the void fraction by a reduction in core natural circulation flow,
          c.  increases water temperature as level is decreased.
          d. results in an increase in fuel temperatures as core steaming rate increases.
  75    QlJESTION:
  During a loss of coolant accident, containment pressure reached 35 psig.
  Which of the following describes the concern with a containment pressure of this
  magnitude?
          a. The containment " burst" pressure was exceeded.
                                                                                          I
          b. The Safety Relief Valves cannot be opened at this pressure.
          c.  The containment venting capability is not available,
                                                                                          i
          d. Suppression pool / containment water level indication is no longer reliable.
                                                                                          l
s
                                                                                          I
6
 
76    QUESTION:
Which of the following is a consequence of allowing suppression pool water level to
decrease below 13 feet?
Suppression pool water level less than 13 feet:
      a.    uncovers the Reactor Core isolation Cooling turbine exhaust line.
      b. reduces the available net positive suction head for the low pressure ECCS
            pumps below minimum required.
      c.    uncovers the top two horizontal vents.
        d. could result in overpressurization of the Containment.
77    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - A reactor startup is in progress
        - The At-The-Controls Operator is withdrawing control rods approaching
          criticality
        - A "SRM Short Period" alarm is received during control rod withdrawal.
What are the REQUIRED actions for these conditions?
The At-The-Controls Operator should immediately:
        a.  stop control rod withdrawal and allow the period to stabilize.
        b. insert a reactor scram if reactor period is less than 30 seconds.
          c. request direction from the Reactor Engineer / Control Room Supervisor,
          d. insert the control rod fully and notify the Control Room Supervisor.
 
    _ . .                    .              _        .          . _ . . _ _    . . _ .. ._ _. .
                                                                                                  ,
  78      QUESTION:
                                                                                                  i
  Given the following conditions:
              The plant has had a failure-to-scram (ATWS) and has deliberately lowered
              water level                                                                        ,
                                                                                                  '
          - Reactor water level is -100 inches
          - Reactor pressure is 385 psig
'
          - Suppression pool water levelis 19 feet 9 inches
          - The Control Room Supervisor has just directed the operators to commence and
              slowly inject with the systems listed in EOP-4 A,"ATWS - Level / Power              ,
              Control"
  Which one of the EOP-4A listed systems must have interlocks defeated prior to use as an
i injection system?
                                                                                                  !
                                                                                                  !
            a.  Low Pressure Coolant injection
            b. Reactor Core isolation Cooling
            c.    High Pressure Core Spray
            d. Condensate /Feedwater
                                                                                                  !
                                                                                                    )
                                                                                                  ,
                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                    ,
                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                  __
                                                                                          )
                                                                                          !
  79    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
        - The plant is shutdown with refueling operations in progress
        - The water level in the refueling cavity is decreasing due to a leak
  Which of the following describes the level indicator used and the conditions under which
  the Main Control Room will see this level decrease?
  The refueling cavity level decrease will:                                                l
        a.  be seen immediately on the Wide Range level indication (recorder and meter).
        b. indicate on the Narrow Range (recorder and meter) as soon as level reaches
              the top of the main steam lines.
        c.  be seen immediately on tuc dpset Range level' indication (recorder).
        d. indicate on the Shutdown Range (meter) before level reaches the reactor
              vessel flange.
                                                                                          !
                                                                                          l
:
 
  . -    . _ - . . . . - .              .-    . . . _    .    -        ... -  .      . . _ _ . __ _ . . _-
                                                                                                                ,
                                                                                                                .I
                                                                                                                l
                                                                                                                l
      80          QUESTION:                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                1
i    Given the following conditions:
l
                  - A plant startup is in progress with the Reactor Mode Switch in "Startup/ Hot                l
;                      Standby"                                                                                  i
                                                                                                                '
g
                  - The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves have just been opened and steam
                      line warming is in progress
'
                  - Main condenser vacuum has been established
                  - A loss of the "A" RPS Bus hasjust occurred
      flow will this bus loss affect the plant assuming it has NOT been restored as directed by
      AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS Bus"?
                  a.        The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves will begin to drift close.
                  b. Main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease.
                  c.        The Recirculation Pumps will automatically trip.
                  d. The Scram Discharge Volume will begin filling.
                                                                                                                l
                                                                                                                l
                                                                                                                l
                                                                                                                )
;
i
I
.
l
l
I
l
l
 
                                                                                        . ..._. .
                                                                                                  ,
81    QUESTION:
Following a transient, the Containment Ventilation system is aligned and operating as
follows:
      - The "A" and "B" Unit Coolers are running, the "C" Unit Cooler is off
      - The Containment Chilled Water Supply and Return Containment Isolation
          Valves are closed
        - The Standby Service Water supply valves to the "A" and "B" unit coolers are
          closed
Which of the following describes what has occurred?
        a.  Drywell pressure has been 3.0 psig for 6 minutes.                                    l
        b. A loss of offsite power has occurred and all three diesel engines started 3
                                                                                                  I
              minutes ago.
        c.  Reactor water level has decreased to -60 inches.
                                                                                                  '
        d. Containment to annulus D/P decreased to -14" WG (vacuum in the
              containment)                                                                        i
                                                                                                  l
 
82    QUESTION:
Gisen the following conditions:
        - The Main Control Room has been evacuated due to toxic gas
                                                                                              f
        - ALL immediate actions were accomplished prior to leaving
        - The Reactor Core Isolation Cooling (RCIC) was operating for reactor water
          level control
        - The RCIC turbine coasted to a stop                                                  ;
                                                                                              i
                                                                                              I
Which of the following describes what occurred to the RCIC system and the system's
current status?
The RCIC:
        a.  system has isolated and is no longer available for reactor water level control
              from the RSP.
        b. turbine tripped, can be locally reset and then restarted from the RSP.
        c.  system has isolated and may be restored once the isolation signal is reset from
              the RSP.
        d. turbine tripped, can be both reset and restarted from the RSP.
                                                                                              I
                                                                                              l
                                                                                              I
 
                                      -        .
l
l
  83      QUESTION:
  While operating in EOP-3," Radioactive Release Control", the operator is directed to
  restart Turbine Building Ventilation ifit is shutdown.
  Which of the following describes how this will affect the Turbine Building and the
  release that is occurring?
  Restarting Turbine Building Ventilation will:
          a.  ensure all building air will be filtered prior to release to the environment.
          b. assure overall radioactive releases will be monitored.
          c.    maintain a positive pressure inside the building.
          d. improve building equipment continued operability.
  84      QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
          - Prior to the transient the plant had been at 100% power
          - A reactor scram and Recirculation Pump automatic transfer to " slow" speed
              occurred
  Which of the following conditions DIRECTLY caused the scram AND Recirculation
    Pump transfer?
            a.  Reactor vessel pressure i127 psig
            b. Main Turbine Stop Valve closure
            c.  High drywell pressure
            d. Reactor vessel water level (Level 4)
l
l
!
 
                          _    -                                                      _
l
  85      QUESTION:
                                                                                          j
  SELECT the reactor vessel water level indicator that provides the most accurate level
                                                                                          ;
  indication to determine if main steam line flooding is occurrine dunng a severe        !
  overfeeding transient?
          a.  Narrow range
          b. Wide range
          c.    Upset range
          d. Shutdown range
                                                                                          i
  80      QUESTION:
  Which of the following conditions will result in a Control Rod Drive (CRD) mechanism
  high temperature?
          a.    Two CRD Stabilizing Valves fail closed.
            b. '.oss of power to the CRD Pressure Control Valve.
            c.  Lo.:s of air to the inservice CRD Flow Control Valve,
            d. The ooling/ exhaust header pressure equalizing valves fail closed.
l
,
i
 
87    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
      - The plant is operating at 75% power
      - The Steam Sea'. Evaporator has just been lost
      - There is NC . le estimate for retum of the evaporator
SELECT the appropriate operator actions for the above conditions.
      a.  Reduce turbine load as necessary to maintain the self-sealing steam supply to
            the turbine glands.
      b. Transfer the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed and maintain power within
            bypass valve capacity.
      c.  Reduce power as required to prevent condenser vacuum from decreasing to
            less than 25 in Hg.
                                                                                          1
        d. Transfer the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed and then trip the main
            turbine.
.
                                                                                          !
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          ,
 
                                                                                          1
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          !
  88    QUESTION:                                                                        i
  Given the following conditions:
            The plant has just had a loss of shutdown cooling
        - Actions were taken to raise water level to +75 inches as indicated on the
            SilUTDOWN Range Level Instrument
        - No other means of forced circulation is immediately available
  What will be the concern if water level subsequently decreases BELOW +75 inches?
                                                                                          l
  Lowering water level:
          a.  may adversely affect the validity of the reactor coolant temperature
              indications.
          b. will reduce the required net positive suction head for restarting shutdown
                cooling.
          c. reduces the margin to the low water level shutdown cooling isolation setpomt.
          d. reduces the amount of relatively cool water available to control the reactor
                temperature increase.
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          l
l
i
1
 
                        -      -            .                        -        -      -- _ . ..
'
                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                  l
                                                                                                  ;
  89    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                  i
        - A reactor and plant startup is in progress with power at 2%
        - RPV pressure is 800 psig
        - The Reactor Mode Switch is in "Startup/flot Standby"
        - The "A" CRD Pump has just tripped
        - The "B" CRD Pump is being lined up for a start                                          !
        - Scram accumulator 32-41 trouble alarm is in and has been verified to be from
            low pressure (indicating 1500 psig)
  Which of the following will the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) use to make the
  determination on declaring control rod 32-41 " Slow" or " Inoperable"? (Note: No other
  accumulator trouble alarms are in.)
  The determination is based upon:
          a.  the control rods' last scram time surveillance results.
          b. the time charging water header pressure will be less than 1520 psig.
          c. the number of control rods fully withdrawn.
                                                                                                  l
          d. drive water pressure availability to fully insert the control rod.
                                                                                                  1
:
l
                                                                                              s
                                                                                                  !
 
'
  90    QUESTION:
  On a total loss of Normal Service Water (NSW) which of the following conditions
  REQUIRE a manual reactor scram?
        a.    Service water temperatures are greater than 90 F and only one NSW Pump
                can be started.
        b. The Standby Service Water system did not start and align itself to the NSW
                system correctly.
        c.    The reactor is critical at 175 F, just below the point of adding heat, with
                power ascension in progress.
          d. The plant is performing a stanup and is just making preparations to roll the
                main turbine.
  91    QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:
          - The plant is operating at 75% power
          - A loss ofinstrument air has occurred
          - Air pressure has reached 67 psig and is steady
          - No control rods have drifted
          - All immediate actions have been taken
          - The At-The-Controls Operator depresses the Feedwater Regulating Valve reset
              pushbuttons
    What will be the expected result for this action?
    Reactor water level will:
            a.  rapidly increase.
            b. rapidly decrease.
            c. remain at the current level.
.
)
l
            d. return to the Master Level Controller setpoint.
l
1
l
l
 
          _      _ .  -        _          _.        -      ,                  . = .
                                                                                      t
-
  92    QUESTION:
3
  Given the following conditions:
        - The plant was operating with both Recirculation Pumps in " Slow" speed
        - The "A" Recirculation Pump has tripped
        - Nuclear instrumentation indicates NO power oscillations are occurring
        - The plant is operating in Region "B" of the Power / Flow Map
  SELECT the action REQUIRED to exit Region "B"                                        i
                                                                                      l
          a.    Insert control rods using the Shutdown Control Rod Sequence Package.  l
          b. Restart the "A" Recirculation Pump in " Slow" speed.
                                                                                      I
          c. Transfer the "B" Recirculation Pump to " Fast" speed.
;        d. Reduce flow in the "B" Recirculation loop.
                                                                                      i
3
  93        QUESTION:
  Given the following conditions:                                                    1
            - The plant was operating at 75% power
            - A Group VI(MSIV) and Group Vll(RWCU) isolation occurred
  Which of the following signals could have caused these isolation?
            a.  Low reactor vessel water level (Level 2)
            b. High drywell pressure
            c.  RWCU equipment area high temperature
            d. Main steam line tunnel high temperature
 
                                                                                            \
  94      QUESTION:
                                                                                              l
  Given the following conditions:
          - Drywell temperature and pressure are increasing due to a leak
          - Drywell pressure is 1.82 psig
          - All expected automatic actions have occurred
          - EOP-2," Primary Containment Control", was entered for high drywell
              temperature and Enclosure 20 for restoration of drywell cooling is in progress
                                                                                            ,
  Once the interlocks have been defeated, which of the following will be providing cooling
  to the drywell?
          a.  Drywell cooler fans and normal service water.
          b. Drywell cooler fans and chilled water.
                                                                                              ;
                                                                                              l
          c.  Drywell cooler fans and standby service water.                                )
          d. Drywell cooler fans ONLY.
  95      QUESTION:
  SELECT the MINIMUM conditions assuring adequate core cooling exists while
  performing Primary Containment Flooding per EOP-4.
  Containment water levelis:
            a. 65 feet with the RPV at 51 psig.
            b. above the Maximum Containment Water Level Limit with the containment          l
                vented.
            c. 65 feet with the RPV vented,
            d. above the Maximum Containment Water Level Limit with the containment at
                25 psig.
,
 
96    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
                                                                                          1
        - The plant is operating in EOP-2, " Primary Containment Control" for high
          suppression pool level,                                                        j
Which of the following is the concern with a continued increase in suppression pool level
greater than 21 feet?
                                                                                          ;
        a.  Suppression pool temperature indications will not be reliable.
        b. ECCS pump suction line pressure and loading limitations may be exceeded.      l
        c.  Safety relief valve operation may result in direct pressuri7ation of primary
            containment.
        d. The unsafe region of the Heat Capacity Level Limit (IICLL) curve will be
                                                                                          i
            entered
                                                                                          I
                                                                                          ,
                                                                                          !
 
                                      .
                                                    _                    _                .
                                                                                              ,
1
                                                                                              I
                                                                                                I
  97    QUESTION:
                                                                                              i
  Given the following cor:ditons:
                                                                                              :
          - The plant is shutdoem
          - The reactor vessel head is installed
                                                                                              i
          - No core alterations are platined
;                                                                                            <
,
          - A loss of all nonnal shutdown cooling has occurred.
  Which of the following is an APPROVED alternate method of decay heat removal for the
,
  above conditions?
          a.  Filling the main steam lines with the condensate pumps and discharging to the
              suppression pool via the Safety Relief Valves (SRV). The suppression pool is
              cooled by RHR.
"                                                                                              ;
.          b. Gravity draining reactor coolant through the RHR heat exchangers to the
              suppression pool. The cooled water will be retumed to the vessel by LPCS.      j
          c.  Circulating reactor coolant from the RPV to the main condenser via the
              MSIVs and MSL drains. The cooled water will be retumed to the vessel by the
.
!
              condensate system.                                                              l
                                                                                                l
<
          d. Start one reactor recirculation pump and place RHR in the Fuel Pool Cooling
i              Assist Mode.
!
!
.,
 
  . . .        .        -    -      -                      _ - - .
                                                                                        I
                                                                                        i
      98      QUESTION
      Uiven the following conditions:
i              - A loss of coolant accident is in progress
                  An Auxiliary Building entry into the HPCS Pump room is needed
              - Radiation levels in that area do NOT allow personnel access
      Which of the following describe the radiation levels in the HPCS Pump room area?
      HPCS Pump room radiation levels are:
              a.    above the maximum normal operating value
                b. above the maximum safe operating value.
                c.    greater than the level necessitating a Site Area Emergency.
-                d. greater than the levels required for an Emergency Depressurization.
        99      QUESTION:
,
        Given the following conditions:
,                - The plant was operating at 55% power
                - A high drywell pressure condition has occurred due to a leak
.
                  - All expected automatic actions have occurred
                                                                                        l
        Which of the following will be the MAXIMUM expected annulus pressure for these ,
        conditions?                                                                    l
                  a.  -0.75 inches W.G.
                  b. -0.50 inches W.G.
                  c.  -0.25 inches W.G.
                  d. 0.00 inches W.G.
                                                                                        l
                                                                                        l
                                                                                        I
 
                                                                                            ,
                                                                                            j
                                                                                            l
100    QUESTION:
Given the following conditions:
        - A failure to scram has occurred
        - Power is 20% with control rods being inserted normally
        - EOP-3," Secondary Containment Control" has been entered due to IIVAC
          cooler high differential temperatures caused by a fire in the Auxiliary Building
        - The Main Steam Isolation Valves have closed
        - Reactor water level control is via Condensate /Feedwater
Which of the following systems should be isolated ifit is discharging into the Auxiliary
Building?
                                                                                            I
                                                                                            ,
        a.  Control Rod Drive l{ydraulics                                                  1
                                                                                            i
        b. Reactor Water Cleanup                                                            )
                                                                                            i
        c.  Fire suppression systems
                                                                                            1
        d. Feedwater.
                                                                                            !
                                                                                            ;
                                                                                            !
                                                                                            !
                                                                                            !
                                                                                            l
                                                                                            i
                                                                                            l
                                                                                            i
}}

Latest revision as of 22:18, 30 June 2020

Insp Rept 50-458/97-01 on 970127-0214.No Violations Noted. Major Areas Inspected:Operations & Engineering
ML20137J625
Person / Time
Site: River Bend Entergy icon.png
Issue date: 04/01/1997
From:
NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION IV)
To:
Shared Package
ML20137J576 List:
References
50-458-97-01, 50-458-97-1, NUDOCS 9704040080
Download: ML20137J625 (126)


See also: IR 05000458/1997001

Text

_ - . . ._ _ .. . .-_

,

ENCLOSURE 1 1

1

'

U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION

i

<

REGION IV

Docket No.: 50-458

License No.: NPF-47

Report No.: 50-458/97-01

) Licensee: Entergy Operations, Inc.

Facility: River Bend Station 1

l

Location: 5485 U.S. Highway 61 .

St. Francisville, Louisiana j

Dates: January 27 through February 14,1997

Inspector: T. O. McKernon, Chief Examiner

Approved By: J. L. Pellet, Chief, Operations Branch '

Division of Reactor Safety

ATTACHMENTS:

Attachment 1: Supplemental Information

Attachment 2: Simulation Facility Report

Attachment 3: Facility Post Examination Comments and NRC Review

Attachment 4: Final Written Examination and Answer Key

I

i

,

9704040000 970401 i

PDR ADOCK 05000458

G PDR

l

-- - _ . - . - . - . _ - . - - - _ - - _ - - - - - - - . . . . - - . . - ._ -

!

-2-

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

River Bend Station

NRC Inspection Report 50-458/97-01

i

!

This inspection evaluated the competency of a senior operator license applicant for '

issuance of an operating license at the River Bend Station facility. -The initial license

examination was developed by the facility using the pilot process program guidance  !

contained in Generic Letter 95-06 and NUREG-1021, Revision 7 and Supplement 1, .  !

" Operating Licensing Examiners Standards." An NRC examiner reviewed, approved, and I

administered the examination. The initial written examination was administered to the

applicant on January 27,1997 by both facility and NRC proctors. The operating test was

administered on January 31,1997 and March 12,1997. The senior operator applicant  ;

'

displayed the requisite knowledge and skills to satisfy the requirements of 10 CFR 55 and

was issued the appropriate license, j

l

Ooerations

  • The draft examination outlines as submitted were not adequate for administration. -

The operating test control room systems proposed were of narrower scope than t

allowed by NUREG-1021 (Section 05.1.1).

!

  • Two potential examination compromises occurred, which were contrary to

examination security practices agreed to by licensee staff (Section 05.1.2).

  • The applicant passed all portions of the initiallicense examination which satisfied i

the requirements of 10 CFR 55.33(a)(2), and was issued the appropriate license in

accordance with 10 CFR 55.51. However, the applicant performed marginally on

the written examination (Sections 04.1,04.2).

  • The licensed operator requalification program performance was reviewed to

ascertain operator performance. The licensee's licensed operators performed

acceptably during recent licensed operator training cycle examinations

(Section 05.3).

1

L * The licensee's written examination prereview was not of sufficient quality as

'

evidenced by over 5 percent of the written examination being identified for change .

'

,-

in the postexamination review (Section 05.1.2).

,

Enaineerina

}

! Improved Technical Specification and the observed plant practices related to

qualification requirements for licensed senior operators (Section E2.1).

L

l_. _ _ ___ _ __ _ _ , . _ _

__ _ .- _. _- .. - _- . - . . .

I

!

-3- ]

Report Details

Summary of Plant Status

The unit remained at 100 percent power during the inspection period. No

significant plant challenges to the operating crew were experienced. l

l

I. Operations i

04 Operator Knowledge and Performance

04.1 Initial Written Examination

a. Inspection Scope

The written examination was co-administered by the licensee training representative

and the NRC examiner onsite on January 27,1997, in accordance with guidance

provided by the chief examiner. This action was taken because of a potential

compromise of examination securits/ which occurred the week prior to the written

examination week. The NRC examiner graded the written examination and the

licensee staff performed a postexamination analysis. As a result of the licensee's

post examination analysis, postexamination comments were submitted to the NRC

on March 3,1997.

b. Observations and Findinas

The applicant passed the written examination with a score of 80.4 percent. After

final NRC review it was determined that the applicant missed 19 out of 97 l

questions. The missed questions were reviewed by both the licensee and the NRC '

,

to ascertain whether a generic weakness or training deficiency existed. No specific

l generic weakness was identified. However, the postexamination review determined

that the applicant demonstrated a potentially weak overall system knowledge in that i

questions related to detailed systems knowledge were typically missed. As such,  !

the applicant performed marginally on the examination.

,

l

'

c. Conclusions

The applicant passed the written examination portion of the license evaluation.

Evaluation of the applicant's performance indicated a potential weakness in the

depth of the applicants overall system knowledge, i

1

l

$

1

I

__

-4-

04.2 Initial Ooeratina Test

a. Inspection Scoce

The NRC examiner administered the various portions of the operating test to the  !

applicant on January 31 and February 12,1997. The applicant participated in two

dynamic simulator scenarios; one while acting as the reactor operator at-the- 1

controls and acting as the control room supervisor in the second. The applicant ]

also received a walkthrcugh test which consisted of ten system and four ]

administrative area tasks and questions. I

b. Observations and Findinas

l

During the simulator portion of the examination, communications practices observed

in the simulator were good. Operator performance in the simulator was also good.

The applicant passed this portion of the examination and demonstrated good

command and control skills.

During the job performance measure portion of the examination, the applicant

demonstrated good plant knowledge and a familiarity in locating components,  !

support items, and reference material. The administrative portion of the I

I

examination was also administered during the plant walkthroughs. The applicant

demonstrated a high degree of familiarity with the plant's administrative functions

and requirements. The applicant passed these portions of the examination.

c. Conclusion

The applicant passed the operating test portion of the examination. Good

communication skills as well as command and control skills were observed. The

applicant demonstrated a high degree of familiarity with plant procedures and in

locating components in the plant.

05 Operator Training and Qualification

05.1 initial Licensina Examination Development

The facility licensee developed the initiallicensing examination in accordance with

guidance provided in Generic Letter 95-06, " Changes in the Operator Licensing

Program."

05.1.1 Examination Outline

a. Scoce

The licensee submitted the initial examination outlines on November 21 and

December 10,1996. The chief examiner reviewed the submittats against the

_ _ - -. . _ _ __ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . - _

l

.5

requirements of NUREG-1021, " Licensed Operator Examiner Standards" Revision 7,  !

Supplement 1, and NUREG/BR-0122, " Examiner's Handbook for Developing

Operator Licensing Written Examinations." Revision 5.

b. Observations and Findinos

The chief examiner determined that the initial examination outlines generally

satisfied the above requirements. However, minor changes to the written l

examination outline were made by revising a knowledge / ability designator. The

chief examiner also noted that the job performance measures outline did not meet

the requirements of Examiner Standard 201-3, item 3b, in that safety functions for

Job Performance Measures 4 and 8 were repeated which resulted in the job

performance measures not covering at least seven different safety functions. Other

observations by the examiner were minor. The comments on the outlines were

discussed with the licensee author and revisions were made and submitted along

with the draft initial examination.

c. Conclusion

The draft examination outlines as submitted were not adequate for administration

The operating test controt room systems proposed were of narrower scope than  ;

allowed by NUREG-1021.  ;

i

05.1.2 Examination Packaae

a. Inspection Scope

The licensee submitted the completed draft examination package between

December 10,1996 and January 6,1997. The chief examiner reviewed the

submittal against the requirements of NUREG-1021, " Licensed Operator Examiner

Standards" Revision 7, Supplement 1 and NUREG/BR-0122, " Examiner's Handbook

for Developing Operator Licensing Written Examinations," Revision 5.

b. Observations and Findinas

l

The draft written examination was transmitted by the licensee to the NRC in a letter

l

dated December 10,1996. The draft written examination was considered properly

l

discriminating. It was responsive to a knowledge and abilities sample plan

l submitted by a letter dated November 21,1996, which was approved by the chief

l examiner. The chief examiner approved the draft examination based upon a review

i

'

of reference material provided with each question. Few substantive comments

were made with most comments of an editorial nature. The written examination

-

was considered adequate as submitted. In response to chief examiner comments,

the licensee enhanced questions 35,43,55,56,62,69,70,76,77,78,81,88,

90, 94, and 97.

i

l

. _ . _ - .- . - . .

6-

Additionally, due to a potential examination compromise, other questions were

replaced. The compromise occurred when a licensed operator, with examination

content knowledge and on the security agreement, interacted with the applicant to

complete systems qualification the week before the examination. The control room

supervisor who was also on the examination security agreement observed the

operator and applicant and halted the activity in progress. The licensee initiated a

condition report, conducted investigations and evaluated the draft examination for

possible overlap with the system qualification job task evaluations. As a result, the i

licensee replaced questions 19 and 33 on the written examination. There was no

indication of an actual compromise to the examination.

The licensee provided postexamination comments on seven written questions which

are attached to this report (Attachment 3). Review of the licensee's submitted post

examination comments resulted in accepting licensee recommendations in deleting

three questions (34,41, 59); a change in the correct answer to one question (15);

and the acceptance of two correct answers for another question (46). The review

also determined that the licensee's recommendations for questions 80 and 89 were

not valid and the questions were retained. Additionally, the NRC reviewed other

questions and determined that question 27 had two possible correct answers. As a

result, after incorporating these changes, the applicant received a score of 78 out of

97, equivalent to 80.4 percent. The as-given written examination and answer key

are attached to this report (Attachment 4).

Because postexamination reviews identified changes based on technical accuracy of

over 5 percent of the written examination, the licensee was asked to explain why

their staff had failed to identify these issues before the examination administration

and to describe corrective actions planned to assure that the next licensed operator

written examination is of higher quality. 1

The licensee submitted three dynamic scenarios, including one backup scenario

which was not used during the examination. The chief examiner had few

comments related to the proposed scenarios. Some general comments related to

statements for operator actions being explicit were made. The second scenario did

not meet the criteria of Examiner Standard 604-1 for contingency actions after

emergency operator performance entry. Other minor spelling errors were also

noted. The licensee reviewed the comments and made the necessary revisions prior

to onsite validation the week of January 27,1997.

During the week of January 27,1997, a second potential examination compromise

occurred when a licensed operator involved in simulator scenario validation

inadvertently left some rough notes related to the first scenario in the simulator, j

The notes were disenvered immediately afterward by the requalification crew i

entering the simu;ator er requalifi:ation training. The licensee took prompt actions

to enter the requalification New c 1 the security agreement, brief all individuals on

the security agreement about . ,ncident and the need for continued vigilance since

the examination was postponed. Wnile the second incident was unrelated, the two

i

1

. . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __._.._m..___..m___ .

. >

'

i

I i

). 'I

, ,

, -7- l

I

1

I

l' events caused the licensee staff to reevaluate the adequacy of their security l

1

measures and to take both short and long-term corrective actions. The licensee

[ replaced the entire set of simulator scenarios, including the backup scenario, to

] ensure that no overlap existed with the potentially compromised scenario. The

j dynamic simulator portion of the examination was postponed until the week of

l February 10,1997.

i

! The chief examiner validated the replacement scenarios during the week of

l February 10,1997. The examiner verified that the replacement scenarios contained

j no overlap with any of the removed scenarios. The examiner also noted that the

, replacement scenarios required modification before administering to ensure the

i examiner standard guidances were fully met with regard to Examiner Standard 301-

5, " Transient and Event Checklist."

1

l The licensee also submitted both job performance measures and questions to cover

] the administrative section of the walkthrough test. The chief examiner reviewed the

i job performance measures and noted a number of comments which were discussed

j informally with the licensee examination author. Most of the comments related to

i the adequacy of the followup questions (e.g., multipart answers required, whether

) question is open or closed reference). Some other com_ments resulted in the job

4 performance measure being replaced. For example, job performance measure

" Manually Startup Standby Gas Treatment Train A taking a suction on Outside Air"

I was considered too simplistic in that the entire jo'o task only had two active steps

! performed by the applicant. In another instance, a job performance measure had

'

potential overlap with an event in one of the scenarios. The licensee was very i

responsive in reviewing the comments and making the necessary revisions. l

e

l c. Conclusions

t

i

Overall, the written examination and operating test materials submitted were of fair

quality and discriminated at the appropriate license level. However, because of NRC

,

comments on the initial draft examinations and potential security compromises, a

4 number of revisions and revalidations prior to examination administration were

required. Additionally, because the licensee submitted over 5 percent of the written
examination for postexamination comment, the licensee's written examination

prereview was not of sufficient quality.

05.2 Simulation Facility Performance

J

.

a. Insoection Scope

i

} The examiner observed simulator performance with regard to fidelity during the

<

examination validation and administration.

4

I

i

,

, - ,

, e--

~

8

,

b. Observations and Findinas

It was observed that the simulator performed well during both the initiallicense

examination validation and administration and during licensed operator

requalification training conducted during the inspection period. Simulator fidelity

issues were not observed during the examination and are reflected in Attachment 2.

j

c. Conclusions 1

'

The simulator supported the examination well. No simulator fidelity issues were

, observed.

05.3 Licensed Operator Reaualification Procram Status (IP 71001)

a. Scope

This portion of the inspection reviewed results from the past two licensed operator j

requalification training cycle examinations and conducted discussions with key i

operations training managers,

b. Observations and Findinas

i

The inspector noted that no operating crew failures occurred during the

. September 2 through October 11,1997, requalification training cycle. Further,

during the annual requalification examinations conducted between October 14 and

December 13,1996, one crew out of nine failed the examination. It was noted that

the crew failure during the annual examination was not one of the same two

operating crews which had difficulty in the simulator during the past August 1996

cycle training. Additionally, the inspector discussed requalification training status

with a key training manager and was informed that crews were taking greater

a

ownership responsibility for their training to include better feedback and self-

critiques of their simulator sessions.

c. Conclusion

The inspector concluded that operator performance based upon recent

4

requalification cycle training and the annual requalification examination had been

,

acceptable.

4

$

1

j

iI

I

9

.

111. Enaineerina '

E2 Engineering Support of Facilities & Equipment j

E2.1 Review of the Uodated Final Safety Analysis Reoort Commitments  !

A recent discovery of a licensee operating their facility in a manner contrary to the

Updated Final Safety Analysis Report description highlighted the need for a special  ;

focused review that compares plant practices, procedures, and/or parameters to the l

Updated Final Safety Analysis Report descriptions. While preparing for the l

inspection discussed in this report, the inspector and the licensee reviewed the I

applicable portions of the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report that related to the  !

areas inspected. The inspector noted that the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report )

training commitment was inconsistent with the observed plant practices,  ;

procedures, and/or parameters in that commitments stated in the licensee's l

Technical Specification. Specifically, Section TR 5.3, " Licensed Operator

qualifications," of the Technical Specifications committed to the minimum

qualifications of the supplemental requirements of NRC letter dated March 28,

1980. The Updated Safety Analysis Report, Section 13.2.1 commits individual I

training programs to comply with Regulatory Guide 1.8 and ANSI /ANS 3.1-1978. l

The licensee has implemented a systems approach to training program in

accordance with Generic Letter 87-07. Further, the licensee's

Procedure TPP-7-009, " Hot License Operator Training and Qualification Program," is

designed to meet the requirements of ANS-3.1-1981 and Regulatory Guide 1.8.

The licensee committed to revise the Final Updated Safety Analysis Report and

Tc, L dcal Specification to reflect their current training program commitments and

reve.nents.

V. Manaaement Meetinas

X1 Exit Meeting Summary

The examiner presented the inspection results to members of the licensee

management at the conclusion of the inspection on February 13,1997. The

licensee acknowledged the findings presented.

The licensee did not identify as proprietary any information or materials examined

during the inspection, j

in addition, the licensee was informed by telephone on March 27,1997, that a 30 l

day response request related to the quality of the licensee's written examination l

prereview would be included in the inspection report cover letter. {

!

I

- -

%. -

, r , , , . , - - , , -- - . --

_. _ _ _

,

ATTACHMENT 1

i

Supplemental Information

1

PARTIAL LIST OF PERSONS CONTACTED '

l

i

Licensee

D. Burnett, Senior Chemist

M. Chilson, Licensing Specialist I

G. Davant, Licensing, Senior Staff

D. Dietzel, Initial Licensed Operator Training Representative

, T. Gates, Plant Engineering Supervisor i

T. Hildebrandt, Outage Manager

l

R. King, Director, Nuclear Safety and Regulatory Affair-s j

D. Lorfing, Licensing Supervisor 1

J. McGaha, Executive Vice President I

J. McGhee, Operations Technical Assist

'

W. O'Malley, Operations Manager l

1

A. Shahkarami, Engineering Manager

W. Stacey, Business Services Manager

C. Sutherland, Training Supervisor

W. Trudell, Operations Training Supervisor ,

M. Wagner, Supervisor, Initial Licensed Operator Training l

L. Woods, Operations Supervisor

G. Zinke, Quality Assurance Manager

l NRC  ;

,

W. Smith, Senior Resident inspector

i

a

!

ATTACHMENT 2

SIMULATION FACILITY REPORT

4

Facility Licensee: River Bend Station

Facility Docket: 50-458

.

l Operating Examinations Administered at: RBS Training Center, St. Francisville, LA

Operating Examinations Administered on: January 31 through Febre y 14,1997

These observations do not constitute audit or inspection findings and are not, without l

further verification and review, indicative of noncompliance with 10 CFR 55.45(b). These '

observations do not affect NRC certification or approval of the simulation facility, other

, than to provide information which may be used in future evaluations. No licensee action is

required in response to these observations.

"

NONE

l

.

%

.,a - > 4+ 2 , +~

l

I

1

i

,

,

ATTACHMENT 3

FACILITY POST EXAMINATION COMMENTS AND NRC POST EXAMINATION REVIEW

s

,

4

4

$

i

3

i.

N

4

4

,

a

>

!  !

J l

1. ,

4

.. - - . . _ _ . - - - ~ . - - - . - - - - .. ...- - -- - - .

.

1-

-

1

, -2-

1

l

. NRC Post-Examination Comment Review

.

1

d.

Question #15; NRC disagrees. Accept only answer (c). The Normal Service Water System j

I

is a nonsafety related system. The only TS surveillances which affect the system are -l

l containment isolation valve testing, IST pumps and valves program, and system radiation

{

j monitor functional testing. Therefore based upon the information provided in the stem only -

j answer (c) is applicable.

!

Question #27; NRC post examination review. Accept either answer (a) or (b). Stem does

j. not specify location of operator or the type of operator.

Question #34; NRC agrees. Delete question, insufficient information provided in stem of

4 question to indicate whether signal is sealed in or just spurious. This question was

specifically identified during the prereview process, reviewed by the licensee and accepted

, in the as-administered format.

j , Question #41; NRC agrees, delete question.

4

Question #46; NRC agrees, accept either answer (a) or (b).

t

Question #59; NRC agrees, delete question.
Question #80; NRC disagrees. Keep as is. The question discriminates whether or not the

! applicant knows that with a loss of the "A" RPS Bus, the condenser air removal pumps are

,

lost. As a result, main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease. The selection of (d) as

j an answer requires presumption that other leaks occur. While instrument air pressure will

decrease in time, the plant response is protracted; the decrease in condenser vacuum

begins almost immediately. Therefore, answer (b) is the most plausible answer based upon )
the conditions provided in the stem of the question.  !

Question #89; NRC disagrees. Keep as is. The question does not require the applicant to

. know the test criteria, but does require the applicant to understand where to look in order I
to call the rod "sdow" or " inoperable". This question was accepted during the licensee's

i prereview process. Further, the training learning objective requires the student to identify

} the TS operability requirements for the CRD Hydraulic and CRD Mechanism systems.

!

4

4

J

1

i

!

-

-.

. . , - ~- ~ ~ . . . . . . . . . ~ . .-.

-

I I

Entergy operations. Inc. '

Awi Berd Sinon

M% U S H,qtmay 61

o Bo i

-

~-

Entergy 'un,220u-

Far 5013814872

_ . . _ . . _ . _ _ . . . _ . - . _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . - _ _ _ . _ _ _ . . _ _ _ . _ . . _ . _ _ ~ _ _ _ . _ _ _

-

'

John R. McGaha. Jr.

. n. m ,

%v t,c e

! -

.

'

i

,

March 3,1997

i

, . Regional Administrator ,

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Region IV

611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400 i,

Arlington, TX 76011

Subject: River Bend Station Submittal of Formal NRC Examination Comments

River Bend Station - Unit 1 -

Docket No. 50-458

4

File No.: G9.5, Gl.41.26

RBF1-97-0075

RBG-43761

RBEXEC-97-030

Ladies and Gentlemen:

In accordance with NUREG-1021, Revision 7, Supplement 1 (ES-402, Attaclunent 3),

enclosed are comments on seven examination questions for your review and consideration.

The enclosed comments and supporting documentation are provided as a result of the

examination conducted at River Bend Station the week of January 27,1997 and February 10,

1997. The chief examiner during the examination was Mr. Thomas McKernon.-

If you have any questions, please contact Mr. Dave Dietzel at (504) 381-4246 or Mr. David G.

Looney at (504) 381-3630.

Sincerely,

'

hsohn

Vice President

McGaha, Jr.

f.

Operations

JRM/kvm

enclosure

River Bend Station Submittal of Formal NRC Examination Comments

March 3,1997

RBF1-97-0075

RBG-43761

RBEXEC-97-030

Page 2 of 2

cc: U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Document Control Desk

Mail Stop PI-37

Washington, DC 20555

NRC Sr. Resident Inspector

P. O. Box 1050

St. Francisville, LA 70775

David Wigginton

NRR Project Manager

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

MS OWFN 13-H-3

Washington, DC 20555

Mr. Thomas McKernon

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Region IV

611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400

Arlington, TX 76011

Mr. Jchn L. Pellet

Chief, Operator Licensing Branch

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Region IV

611 Ryan Plaza Drive, Suite 400

Arlington, TX 76011

i

- - -

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . --_

Question 15 Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

.

During performance of flow balance surveillance testing on Answer: d Accept both answers (c)

the Normal Service Water System, several valves that are and (d).

normally full open need to be throttled for the duration of

the test. Reference:

Which of the following describes how the change in status ADM-0015

of these valve will be tracked? ADM-0022

a. The throttle valve computerized listing will be Comments:

updated and a Change Notice (CN) for the valve

realignment will be completed for SOP-0018, Response (c) could also be correct.

" Normal Service Water".

c. is correct for non Tech. Spec. testing

b. A Procedure Revision for the valve realignment activities (ADM-0022).

will be completed for SOP-0018," Normal d. is correct for Tech. Spec. testing activities

Service Water" and an entry made in the Control (ADM-0015).  !

Room log.

c. The repositioning of the valves will be

documented per the guidance in ADM-0022,

" Conduct of Operations"

d. The repositioning of the valves will be controlled

by tracking all manipulations as required in the

sun eillance test package. .

(continued next page)

l

_ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ - - - - - - _ - _ _ - _ _ . - - _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _- _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ ___ -- _ _ _ _ _ _-. --

. - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _

Question 15 Comments Recommendations !

$

l

The use of the term " Normal Service Water" implies the

manipulation of Non Safety-Related components which

could be documented per ADM-0022," Conduct of

Operations." The use of the term " surveillance testing"

implies the manipulation of Safety-Related components

during surveillance testing which are documented per

ADM-0015," Surveillance Testing." Given the disparity

in the stem of the question, ADM-0015 is no longer the

ONLY reference to govern this unusual operation.

ADM-0022," Conduct of Operations" provides guidance

for operational activities and therefore becomes an

expected response.

. ADM-0022, Section 6.3 " System Check Lists," could

provide guidance,

" . system checklists are used for establishing and

confirming the status of equipment and systems.

proper system configuration is assured and

maintained by use of administrative controls

(i.e., SOP, MDL, OSP-0014, Temp. Alt.) "

. ADM-0015, Step 7.11.5 would provide guidance for

repositioning valves required to be manipulated as

part of the surveillance test package.

T_______._-__________

- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

6.2.2. Routine procedural actions that are frequently perfonned may

not necessitate the use of a procedure. If there is any doubt as

to the procedural action by the individual performing the job,

the procedure must be in hand.

6.2.3. Entry conditions of emergency procedures shall be committed

to memory by licensed personnel.

6.2.4. The red diagonal lines on selected annunciator windows, in the

Control Room, are installed as a visual aid. These red

diagonal lines denote annunciators requiring review of the

EOP's for possible.cntry conditions.

6.2.5. If an evolution is suspended for an extended period of time,

reverification of the initial conditions is required as

determined by the OSS/CRS.

6.2.6. In the event that an original procedure checklist, STP or

tagging order becomes contammated the information should

be transferred to a clean copy of the document. This should be

noted at the top of the document along with the name of the

individual who is transferring the data.


+ 6.3 System Check Lists (Ref. 2.54)

NOTE

During Refueling Outages all safety-related valve lineups

shallbeperformed (Ref 2.44)

6.3.1. System checklists are used for establishing and confirming the

status of equipment and systems. System checklists'are

performed as a prerequisite for system operation and

periodically for equipment status verification.

1. Following performance of system checklists, proper

system configuration is assured and maintained by use of

administrative controls. (i.e., SOP, MDL, OSP-0014,

Temp Alt.)

,,.

ADM-0022 REV - 19 PAGE 40 OF 53

i

6 PLANT OPERATING PROCEDURES j

6.1 Procedure Compliance

1

6.1.1. Plant equipment shall be operated in accordance with current

written approved procedures.

6.1.2. If the individual actually performing the activity cannot or

believes he should not follow the procedure governing that

activity as written, he shall place the system / component into a

stable and safe condition and inform the responsible

supervisor. The s'ukervisor shall resolve the discrepancy in the

procedure by either:

1. Determining the methods by which the activity can be

performed using the procedure as written and conveying

this to the individual performing the activity, or

2. Submitting a procedure change, either temporary or

permanent depending on the actual situation. No funher

procedural steps shall be accomplished until the procedure

change is approved in accordance with RBNP-001.

6.1.3. In the event of an emergency not covered by an approved

procedure, operators shall take action so as to minimize

personnel injury, damage to the facility, and to protect the

health and safety of the public. Such deviations to procedures

shall be approved by the OSS/CRS prior to action or

deviation.

6.1.4. No interlock will be bypassed or defeated from performing its

function unless it is accomplished in accordance with an

approved procedure or work request.

6.2 Procedure imp'ementation

6.2.1. Procedures that control operations where reliance on memory

cannot be trusted and where operations must be performed in a

specified sequence shall be followed step-by-step with the

procedure in hand. Many procedures will also require

signoffs, while others may need to be referred to only

occasionally.

>

ADM-0022 REV - 19 PAGE 39 OF 53

-

- - - - . - - - - . - . _ _ - . _ . , . . - . - .

>

t ,

TITLE:

)

= nterW STATION SURVFITLANCE TEST PROGRAM

-l Operations.

River Bend Station

.

5. Include data tables within the procedure to record i

As-Found and As-Left Data. When it is better to

locate the data tables in one location, append the

i consolidated data sheets as Attachment pages to the

2 end of the surveillance procedure.

  • The acceptance criteria or tolerances in the tables

should be expressed in quantitative terms (e.g. 2

,

turns,100 inch- pounds, etc.) compatible with

item being read.

'

6. Cautions and notes applicable to specific steps

3

inserted prior to performance of the step.

  • 7. The acceptance criteria for the Surveillance should

'

be specified in the process parameters the test uses.

- ~

- 7.11.5 A restoration section should contain the following:

) C 1. Detailed instructions for restoration of the

component (s) to its required configuration.

i

. Include verification of the operability of the

component, if practical.

'

l C * Independent verification shall be perfonned on

safety-related system restoration. ,

2. A table to provide spaces for listing the test

equipment if required. All test instruments used to

record data in the test shall be listed by M&TE I.D.

Number and calibration duc date.

3. A channel check of the instrument for restoration

verification. Normally a table of like channel

comparison data.

C 4. Step fer notifying the Nuclear Control Operator of

test completion.

C 5. Step for notifying the OSS/CRS of test completion.

C 7.12 Acceptance Criteria

7.12.1 Acceptance Criteria is that criteria which is required by

the governing document.

ADM-0015 REV - 17 PAGE 24 OF 45

Question 34 Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

Given the following conditions: Answer: b

Throw out question

- The HPCS Diesel Generator had been in a normal since there are 3 possible

standby lineup Reference: correct answers.

- An automatic start signal hasjust been received

- The diesel generator has responded as designed SOP-0052,"HPCS Diesel Generator", Rev.12,

- It has been determined that NO VALID start signal Section 2.1.27, Page 6

condition exists LO - HLO-075-3 #10.b.3

What are the required IMMEDIATE actions for these Comments:

conditions?

The question stem does not provide adequate

a. Depress the local panel Emergency Stop information for the candidate to identify a single

pushbutton and place the Engine Mode Control correct response. The conditions are presented in

Switch in " TEST". such a way that two interpretations are possible.

b. Depress the Main Control Room Emergency First case, as the question was originally intended,

Stop pushbutton and direct the local operator to an automatic start signal is " locked in" and has been

place the Engine Mode Control switch in determined to not be valid. In this condition, the

"MAINT". only way to stop the machine is to use the

emergency stop pushbutton, as identified in answer

c. Place the Diesel Generator Mode Switch to "b"(placing the mode switch in "MAINT" would

" LOCAL MANUAL" and direct the local prevent subsequent restart; precaution 2.1.27 of

operator to place the Diesel Generator Control SOP-0052)

switch to "STOP".

d. Verify the Diesel Generator Mode Switch in

" REMOTE MANUAL" and place the Main

Control Room Diesel Generator Control switch

to "STOP".

(continued next page)

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ .. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . _ _ _ _ ._ _ _ _ _ . . _ . ._

_

.

-

Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

-

Question 34

Second case, although an automatic start signal has

been received, the statement in the stem "It has been

determined that NO VALID start signal condition

exists" implies no start signal or condition is

currently present. In this case, use of the emergency

trip button is not appropriate (see SOP-0052

precaution 2.1.22) and not required to stop the

machine. Both "c" and "d" would stop the diesel

under the circumstances described.

Note: The Diesel Generator mode switch positions

on the panel are " REMOTE" and " LOCAL" instead

of" REMOTE MANUAL" and " LOCAL

MANUAL". However, since both positions simply

set up the manual control functions, this level of

discrimination is not appropriate for determining the

i

distracters are incorrect. (i.e. to eliminate "c" and

"d" the candidate would need to know the exact

switch nomenclature).

. - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - . _. _ _ - - . - - - .. . . - _ _

. _ . - - _

!

l __. 4 Generator reverse power.

1

5 Generator overcurrent

i

6 Engine low lube oil pressure

7. Engine high temperature (jacket cooling water)

8. Engine overcrank .:vcle 220 seconds with no start

2.1.21 Anytime the diesel engice has tripped automatically, the operator is required

to depress the "STOP" pushbutton on IE22*PNLS001 engine panel or by

using the control switch on lH13*P601, (depending on where control is).

This will drop out the K1 relay which seals in upon a start. Failure to do so

will result in an automatic restart of the engine when the trip condition

clears.

---+ 2.1.22 Depressing the local or remote EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton will cause

a diesel tnp evea with an emergency start signal present. This pushbutton

should only be depressed under extreme emergencies. For normal eperation

the local or remote STOP pushbutton should be used.

2.1.23 The IDTM*V62 TURBOCHARGER AIR BOX DRAIN VALVE must be

maintained throttled open during all operations involving running of the

diesel engine.

2.1.24 When the diesel is running in parallel with the grid a fault on the grid could

cause a loss cf the bus associated with the diesel concurrent with a

trip / lockout of the diesel. To reduce the chances of this occurring minimize

the time spent with the diesel paralleled to the grid.

2.1.25 Operating data pertaining to diesel generator start attempts shall be obtained

per PEP-0026. DIESEL GENERATOR TRENDING AND FAILURE

REPORTING.

2.1.26 During diesel fuel oil unloading, a fire watch shall be stationed at the

unloading area and two (2) 150 pound dry chemical extinguishers placed

near unloading area.

___

y 2 1.27 If the diesel receives an inadvertent auto start signal that is determined not

to represent a valid emergency start condition,immediately depress the local

or emote EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton then place the local ENGINE

CONT'.0L switch in the MAINT position. After the signal source has been

identitled and the auto start circuhs reset, depress the local or remote STOP

pushbutton prior to placing the local ENGINE CONTROL switch in the

AUTO position when returning the diesel generator to a standby mode.

i

Valid auto start signals are indicated as follows:

l

1. An ECCS auto start signal is identified at lH13*P601 by the white'

l indicating light at the HPCS INITIATION RESET pushbutton being

! illuminated and at IE22*PNLS001 by the white indicating light above

l the LOCKOUT RELAY being off.

SOP-0052 REV - 12 PAGE 6 OF 58

. . - - . .-- - _. - - . _ _ - -- -- .- -

'

,

i

4.1.15. Establish CRD System flow with isolated HCU/CRDs as follows:

NOTE

A sufficient number ofHCUs must be aligned to accept

cooling waterflow at the minimumpow rate expected

through the C11-F002A(B), CRD Flow Control Valve.

Each CRD will accept about U3 gpm at approximately 15

psid. For example. if10 gpm systemflow is expected with

C11-F002A(B) fully closed, 30 HCUs must be alignedfor ,

coolingjlow to limit cooling headerpressure to 15psid. A

higherflow rate orfewer HCUs will result in an

undesirable higher cooling header diferentialpressure.

1. Align cooling water to at least 30 HCUs by opening as a minimum the

valves shown on Attachment 5, Post Maintenance Unisolated CRDs, to

allow for sufficient cooling water flew for CRD Pump start. The number

of HCUs may be increased or decreased at OSS/CRS discretion. The

following HCUs should be included in this group:

1) East Side (270 deg) - 04-33,04-29,04-25,04-21,04-17,08-13,

12-13,16-09,12-09,24-05,20-05, and 16-05 1

2) West Side (90 deg)- 52-37,52-33,52-29,52-25,52-21,52-17,48-17,

48-13,44-09,44-13,40-09, and 36-09

^

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to an unvented CRD from an inadvertant scram, any HCU or

CRD which has been opened for maintenance should remain isolated from the charging

header with HCU-XXXX-V113 CHARGING WATER RISER ISOL VLV closed and

HCU-XXXX-V107, SCRAM ACCUMULATOR DRAIN VLV opened one turn. Do ant

unisolate charging water to the CRD until it has been vented.

2. Verify charging water is isolated to any accumulators which were opened

for maintenance and document this verification on Attachment 6, Post

Maintenance Isolated Accumulators.

3. IE the Reactor is depressurized, THEN open Cl1-VF062, DR WTR PC

STATION RELIEF LINE TO R.B. DRNS ISOL VLV.

4. Start C11-COOI A(C001B), CRD PUMP A(B).

l

!

!

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 9 OF 91

_. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ __ __ _ _ . _ _ ._ .____ _ ._ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _

!

CAUTION

l

To prevent possible damage to an unvented CRD from an inadvertant scram, any HCU or

l

!

CRD which has been opened for maintenance'should remain isolated from the charging

header with HCU-XXXX-V113, CHARGING WATER RISER ISOL VLV closed, and

l

l

HCU-XXXX-V107, SCRAM ACCUMULATOR DRAIN VLV opened one turn. Do nM

l unisolate charging water to the CRD untilit has ber.n vented.

4.1.13. VetLt charging water is isolated to any accumulators which were opened for '

maintenance and document this verification on Attachment 6, Post

Maintenance Isolated Accumulators.

4.1.14. Establish normal CRD System flow as follows:

1. Start Cl1-C001 A(C001B), CRD PUMP A(B).

2. Slowly open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK

VLV.

NOTE

It may take several minutesfor the accumulators to charge.

3. Check the accumulators are charged by observing:

  • At H13-P680, WHEN the Accumulator Fault Pushbutton is depressed, i

THEN All ACCUMULATOR lights on the full core display are off for

the in service accumulators.

TROUBLE annunciator at H13-P680 is clear.

4. Using Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER

Cl1-F002A/B in MANUAL mode, and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER

PRESS CONTROL VALVE, establish a Drive Water Differential Pressure

of 250 psid at a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.

5. Go To Step 4.1.16.

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 8 OF 91

..

_ _ . _ .. .. _ _._. _ . _. ____ _ _ _._ _ _ - . . _ _ _ _ . . _ . ._ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

s

i '

I

I

,

i'

4.1.3. Check the oil level for CRD Pump A(B) and its associated gear box is normal. l

i

4.1.4. Vent the online CRD Pump Suction Filter using DER-V3002(V3004), l

,

Cl1-FLT010A(B) VENT VALVE.

'. 4.1.5. Vent both the CRD Pump A and B casings using C11-VF109A and B, CRD

I PUMP A and B CASING VENT VLV. l

1

,

4.1.6. Vent the online CRD Pump Discharge filter using C11-VF022A(B), CRD

-

PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV and DER-V8(V10),

C11-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE.

d

4.1.7. Start Cl1-C001 AP(BP), CRD AUX OIL PUMP A(B).

i 4.1.8. Verify Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B) white light comes on.

4.1.9. Close, then throttle open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP

) CHECK VLV open one turn off the closed seat.

,

l.s 4.1.10. Place Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER

i C11-F002A/B in MANUAL at.0% output.

Y

4.1.11. Verify suction pressure is at least 15 psig on local indicator Cl1-R017A(B).

NOTE

. All 145 HCUs are not required to be in a normal valve

b lineup prior to starting the CRDpumps. HCUs which have

1 been isolated for maintenance cannot befully returned to

l service until after the CRD pump is operating.

i

-

4.1.12. IE more than 12 HCU/CRDs were isolated for maintenance, THEN Go To Step

.

4.1.15 for HCU alignment and CRD Pump start.

i

8

i

3 l

j  !

a

,

4

1

i

i

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 7 OF 91

-_ -_ - _- -

-. . .- - -.. . . - - ~ . _ . ._- .- , . --

.

3.2 Check Condensate Storage, Makeup, and Transfer is in operation per SOP-0008,-

Condensate Storage, Makeup, and Transfer System.

3.3 Check Drywell and Containment Leak Detection is in operation per SOP-0033, Leak

'

Detection.

1 3.4 Check Reactor Plant Component Cooling Water is in operation per SOP-0016. Reactor

Plant Component Cooling Water System.

. 3.5 Check Nuclear Boiler Instrumentation is in operation per SOP-0001, Nuclear Boiler

.

Instrumentation.

.

.

3.6 Check Reactor Protection is in operation per SOP-0079, Reactor Protection System.

4

3.7 Check the following electrical systems are in operation:

j

i 3.7.1. 4160 VAC per SOP-0046

.

3.7.2. 480 VAC per SOP-0047

3.7.3. 120 VAC per SOP-0048

! 3.7.4. 125 VDC per SOP-0049

i

i 3.8 Verify B33 MOVF023 A and B, Recire Pump Suction Valves are open to prevent

!

overpressurization of the Recirculation Pump Piping.

'

NOTE

'

k All 145 HCUs are aal required to be in a normal valve

lineupprior to starting the CRDpumps. HCUs which have

i been isolated for maintenance cannot befully returned to

i service until after the CRDpump is operating. -

.

.

3.9 Verify system is lined up for startup.

4 4 SYSTEM STARTUP

l .

.

1 4.1 Placing the CRD System in Operation

4.1.1. Charge all HCU Accumulators which are lined up for startup with nitrogen per

-

Section 4.3.

4.1.2. Verify that the Reference Leg Backfill System has been isolated per

SOP-0001.

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 6 OF 91

-- ._ . . ,,

05280025

ENT

9 PSID

25 HG. ABS RWCU l REF. LEG

CST (apAnj ^

"

MANUAL AIR

SUCTION CRD E I d'

FILTERS PUMPS 20 PSID s6 l

{APAHj I

l

STRAINERS A

~

CONT.I

%

"'

"' ISOL. t

0-2500 PStG

., ,, ,,

CONDENSATE

-m

g I g -- -,

SYSTEM mm

- '

. .

- ' DeSCHARGE ,

T g "i FILTERS RECIRC 4

20 GPM SEAL PURGE 1600 PSIG

( PAL }-

_T__

"

A E AIR

NT

i MANUAL

T CHARGING WATER HEADER

,

,H ,H ,H':

i

N FLOW RESTRICTING

ORIFICES

3 CRD HYD CONTROL UNIT

CRDM 250*F I

3 (TYPICAL OF 145)

(TYP. OF 145)

TAH)l

1 I REACTOR '

I PRESSURE

I

- _,,_ __ l EQUALIZING ING DRIVE

g VALVES

- 1

"ny' WATER

l

I O

l-

I

I

[

-, g

ap

$50 PSU

p

AP

0-350

I RV _

I

,

l gs EKHAUsr waren McAnen

g 85 PSID py,, ,m,

psto

3 INLET

PCV

A 3

I

II

RV VENTS

I "2 N# 520 I27 I S

- -

75 PSID

I

%d

~~~g

i

,

Spy 0-70 GPM 0-5

DIRECT (TYP OF 4)

I STABLIZING

I d CONTROL I CONTAINMENT VALVES )(

g VALVES VALVE I

-+ EQUIPMENT (TYPICAL OF 4)

60cc H,0 g

DRAINS DRAINS '~

3 ,

l

( AH/L ) 1600 PSIG

l DRIVE WATER HEADER (TYP. OF 4)

e----------------------------__,

I

.

CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM _

R:S.1.STM oPST.Aw52 . i

e

_ _ _ _ _ - - - . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . - _ . _ . - - - . _ _ - . .- . - _ _ - _ _ _ . . _ . - . _ . _ - - . _ . . _ . . .__.__ --__.-- _-___.-.___.-__ _-.__-._______ -_____

-

l

..  ;

!

3. Remote Controls and Indications

Remote Flow Indicator C11-FIR 606 (H13-PNLP601)- 0-100 GPM

1

=

Flow Controller Cl1-FCR600 (H13 PNLP601) Manual / Auto control

  • Flow Controller Valve Cl 1-FVF002A/B (H13-PNLP601) Indicating Lights-GREEN-

CLOSED, RED-OPEN

4. Automatic Features

Valve fails closed on loss ofinstrument air

1.3.2.7 Drive Water Header (Figure 1)  !

1. Description *

,

There are 4 drive water headers each is equipped with a stabilizing unit. The stabilizing

valves are controlled automatically by RCalS. They will close during control rod

movement to divert water from the cooling water header to the drive water header. This

is done to maintain a constant system pressure during rod movement.- The stabilizing

valve units consist of two normally open parallel solenoid operated valves. Needle valves

down stream of each stabilizing valve are set such that each valve passes 2 gpm. On a  ;

control rod insert both stabilizing valves close which provides a 4 gpm flow to the bottom  !

of the drive piston. On a control rod withdraw one stabilizing valve closes which

provides a 2 gpm flow to the top of the drive piston.

t Drive water pressure is manually controlled by Pressure Control Valve Cl1-MOVF003 at

reactor pressure plus 250 psig. Drive water pressure may also be controlled by a manual

bypass around the Pressure Control Valve. Should drive water exceed 550 psid a relief

valve opens relieving to the cooling water header. This feature avoids the possibility of

excess water pressure causing excessive control rod drive speeds.

nne.c,u encranne,an o scc se ncis

Question 41 Comments Recommendations

SOP-0002," Control Rod Drive System" 4.1 Section

" Placing the CPS System in Operation," states that

system flow and drive pressure will need to be

adjusted to obtain a d/p of 250 psid. Throughout this

procedure, during normal system operations and

evolutions, drive pressure will need to be adjusted

to obtain and maintain a d/p of 250 psid. STM-

A0052.00 states that," Drive water pressuce is

manually controlled by PCV at reactor pressure plus

250 psig."

__ _

. ___ _ -_ - __-_- - ___-_-___ - ___ __ - _ __ - . --.

_ ._ .-

. __ m . _ . _ -. _ _ . . . _ _ _

Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

Question 41

Prior to a startup with the plant in a cold, depressurized Answer: c Throw out this question,

condition, the Unit Operator adjusts the Control Rod Drive since there is no correct

Ilydraulic (CRD) system Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to answer.

maintain 250 psid between drive water header pressure and Referenec:

reactor pressure.

STM-A0052.00

llow is this pressure differential maintained as reactor SOP-0002

pressure increases during the ensuing startup to 100%

power? (Assume the CRD system is operating as designed.) Comments:

As reactor pressure increases during the startup: No correct answer.

a. the Pressure Control Valve automatically Answer (c) assumes that the system is operating

operates to maintain CRD system pressure above differently than the installed design. If the CRD

reactor pressure. system is operating as installed (the design has not

been changed), then the Pressure Control Valve

b. the Unit Operator must periodically open the must be periodically throttled closed to maintain the

Pressure Control Valve to maintain the required differential pressure between drive water header

differential pressure. pressure and reactor pressure. During a plant

startup, the Pressure Control Valve must be throttled

c. the Flow Control Valve automatically opens to in the closed direction to maintain the differential

maintain a constant flow, therefore a constant d/p pressure between CRD water and reactor pressure,

across the PCV. as reactor pressure increases.

d. the Unit Operator must periodically adjust the

Flow Control Valve to maintain CRD system

pressure above reactor pressure.

(continued next page)

-_ _ -_-__--- - - - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - _ - - - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _ - - _ - _ _ - - _ _ - _ - - - - - _ _ _

. - . _ _

__ 2. An undervoltage auto start signal is identified at IH13*P601 by the DIV

Ill 4KV BUS UNDERVOLTAGE annunciator being in alarm. There is .

, no indication of an undervoltage auto start signal at IE22*PNLS001. l

!

22 Engine Gooling System j

2.2.1 Do not open expansion tank 611er cap unless the system is cool. Then  ;

partially open the filler cap to relieve pressure prior to complete removal of l

the cap.

2.2.2 Ensure Immersion Heater control switch is in "OFF" anytime the cooling .

system or immersion Heater is not filled with coolant. l

2.3 Fuel Oil System

2.3.1 Anytime work is done on the fuel oil day tank level instrumentation the

control switch for the Fuel Oil Transfer Pump must be placed in "OFF" to

preclude pumping diesel fuel to the roof.

2.3.2 If the diesel is run for one hour or longer, check and drain from the day

tank any accumulated water via valve IEGF*V71 DAY TANK DRAIN.

2.4 Lube Oil System

2.4.1 Do not remove round caps from tube oil strainer housing with the engine

runmng.

2.4.2 Before attempting to start a new engine or one that has had internal

maintenance performed a prelubrication must be performed in accordance

with the EMD Vendor's Manual.

2.4.3 Before any Normal start of the standby diesel proper prelubrication shall be

verified in accordance with Section 4.2.1.

2.4.4 The engine oil sump level should be between the LOW and FULL marks on

the dipstick with the engine running. The level should be just above the 3/4

FULL mark with the engine idle.

2.4.5 The lube oil system level should be between the upper and lower

sightglasses with the engine shutdown and above the upper sightglass with

the engine running.

2.4.6 \ After changing oil filter elements or performing any evolution which

involves draining the accessory on system of the diesel, the oil system must

be refilled, the strainer box verified full, and the SOAKBACK (Turbo)

LUBE OIL pumps operated for at least 30 minutes prior to starting the

engine. The engine should then be brought to an unloaded condition to

assure complete filling of accessories before any subsequent loading is done.

2.4.7 Oil level in the engine governor should be maintained at or above the fill

mark on the sightglass with the diesel shutdown. With diesel in operation

the suggested level is 1/4" of fill mark.

SOP-0052 REV - 12 PAGE 7 OF 5%

.. .. . . . - . - . . .- -- . . ..- -_ _

5. Close, then slowly open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP

CHECK VLV.

3

NOTE

' It may take several minutesfor ti' recumulators to charge.

6. With exception of the accumulators listed on Attachment 6, Post

4

Maintenance Isolated Accumulators; at H13-P680, WHEN the

Accumulator Fault Pushbutton is depressed, THEN All

5 ACCUMULATOR lights on the full core display are off for the in service

4 accumulators.

7. WHEN flow has stabilized, E Cl1-VF062, DR WTR PC STATION

RELIEF LINE TO R.B. DRNS ISOL VLV was opened in Step 4.1.15.3,

THEN close the valve while monitoring cooling header differential

pressure. E cooling header differential pressure exceeds 30 psid, THEN

'

secure the CRD Pump. Pump startup may be re-attempted after additional

4

HCUs are aligned for cooling flow.

l

NOTE

A lowerflow rate may be established as required by the

h

Operatiom Shift Superintendent as long as adequate

,

cooling isprovidedfor the CRDs.

f L 8. Adjust system flow and drive pressure using Cl1-R600, CRD

HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-

F003, CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a

flow equal to 0.31 times the number of CRDs aligned for cooling flow and

a differential pressure of 250 psid.

i 4.1.16. E the Reactor is depressurized, THEN fill and vent the system in accordance

i with Section 4.2.

t

!

4.2 System Fill and Vent

NOTE

s

Fill and vent ofthe CRD System and HCU/CRDs is nal

required ifthe Reactor is pressurized.

j

4.2.1. Verify the CRD System is in operation per Section 4.1.

!

i

i

!

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 10 OF 91

!

_ _

!

SYSTEM NORM AL OPERATION

.

5 l

.

5.1 Alternating CRD Pumps

i

NOTE

To minimize the potential impact ofpressure transients in the CRD l

j

Hydraulic System, shifting CRD Pumps when Reactor pressure is

greater than 0 psig but less thanfull operating pressure should be

avoided except in extraordinary circumstances. l

5.1.1. Perform the following steps for the CRD Pump to be started.

1. Check that the oil level for CRD Pump A(B) and its associated gear box is ,

normal. l

2. Close Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.

C

3. Vent the CRD Pump A(B) casing using Cl1-VF109A(B), CRD PUMP

A(B) CASING VENT VLV.

4. Start Cl1-C001 AP(BP), CRD AUX OIL PUMP A(B).

5. Verify white light comes on for Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B).

i

6. Stan C11-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B) and immediately, but slowly, l

C

open Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.

7. Verify CRD Pump A(B)is operating properly.

5.1.2. Check that CRD System flow has stabilized. j

5.1.3. Perform the following steps for the CRD Pump to be stopped:

1. Close Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK VLV.

!

2. Stop Cl1-C001 A(B), CRD PUMP A(B).

5.1.4. Vedfy that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are normal. IE they are

NOI, THEN use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW FLOW l

CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS

CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to establish an

indicated value for Ddve Water DitTerential Pressure of 250 psid and a flow

rate of 41 to 49 gpm.

90P 0002 REV - 14 PAGE 20 OF 91

- . -. . - . . - . - - - - . - . _ . . _ . - - - - . - . - - - - -

l

t

. i

'

!

. .

l

5.1.5. Slowly reopen Cl1-VF014A(B), CRD PMP A(B) DISCH STOP CHECK l

VLV for the CRD Pump which was stopped.

,

5.2 Alternating Flow Control Valves

NOTE l

Changeover ofthe Flow Control Valves is performed at the

Local Flow ControlStations. C11-D009A(B) unless

otherwise noted. l

5.2.1. Verify Cl1-VF127A(B), INST AIR SPLY TO Cl1-FV-F002A(B) is open. 3

5.2.2. Verify the following for the flow control valve to be placed in service:

1. Flow Control Valve AUTO / MANUAL Transfer Switch in MANUAL.

2. Manual control knob adjusted to its minimum position.

5.2.3. Open C11-VF046A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) INLET ISOL VLV, for

the flow control valve to be placed in service.

5.2.4. Open C11-VF047A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) OUTLET ISOL VLV,

for the flow control valve to be placed in service.

5.2.5. Slowly open the standby Cl1-FV-F002A(B), CRD FLOW CONTROL

VALVE, and observe the previously irservice Cl1-FV-F002A(B), CRD

FLOW CONTROL VALVE, de3es.

5.2.6. WHEN the previously inservice flow control valve is fully closed, THEN

adjust its manual control knob to minimum position, and place its

AUTO / MANUAL Transfer Switch in MANUAL.'

5.2.7. Verify that the automatic and manual signals of the flow control valve being

placed in service are matched. Then place the AUTO / MANUAL Transfer

Switchin AUTO.

5.2.8. Close Cl1-VF047A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) OUTLET ISOL VLV,

for the flow control valve being removed from service.

5.2.9. Close Cl1-VF046A(B), FLOW CONT VLV F002A(B) INLET ISOL VLV,

for the flow control valve being removed from service.

5.2.10. Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 21 OF 91

. .- . . - . . - . . - . . . - - - . - - . - .- -.-_- -.. --

'

!

'

.

O 5.2.11. In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are ,

normal. IE they are nal, THEN use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW  !

FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER

PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to

establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250 psid

and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.

)

5.3 Alternating Discharge Filters

l

5.3.1. Verify the Cl1-PDIS-N002, Filter Differential Pressure Indicating Switch is in l

operation.

l

5.3.2. Perform the following for the filter to be placed in operation.

1. Open Cl1-VF020A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTERS D003A(B) INLET

ISOL VALVE.

2. Open Cl1-VF022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003 A(B) VENT

VLV and DER-V8(V10), Cl1-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE. WHEN

air-free water is vented from filter, THEN close Cl 1-VF022A(B), VENT

,

VALVE and DER-V8(V10), Cl 1-FLTD003 A(B) VENT VALVE.

3. Slowly open Cll-VF021 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B)

OUTLET ISOL VLV.

5.3.3. Perform the following for the filter being removed from service.

i

I

I

CAUTION

Backflow thrsgh the filter could damage the filter cartridge. Do nal.close C11-VF020A(B)

before closing C11-VF021 A(B).

1. Close Cl1-VF021 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) OUTLET

ISOL VALVE.

2. Verify proper filter operation by observing Cl1-PDIS-N002 is in normal

band.

3. Close Cl1-VF020A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003 A(B) INLET

ISOL VALVE.

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 22 OF 91

-. - . - - - - - - - . - - - . - - . . - . .. . .. .. . .- _

i

I

5.3.4. Drain the filter removed from service by performing the following:

1. Open the following valves:

/) Cl 1-F022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV l

'

2) Cl1-VF023A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) DRAIN

VLV

3) DER-V8(V10), Cl 1-FLTD003 A(B) VENT VALVE

4) DER-V9(V11), Cl1-FLTD003A(B) DRAIN VALVE

'

2. WHEN filter is completely drained, THEN close the following valves:

1) Cl1-F022A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) VENT VLV l

2) Cl1-VF023 A(B), CRD PMP DISCH FILTER D003A(B) DRAIN

VLV

1

3) DER-V8(V10), C11-FLTD003A(B) VENT VALVE l

4) DER-V9(V i 1), C11-FLTD003 A(B) DRAIN VALVE

1

5.3.5. Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.

.

5.3.6. In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are

normal. IE they are HQI, THEN use C11-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS

FLOW FLOW CONTROLLER C11-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE

WATER PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed

to establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250

psid and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.

l

l

l

.

l

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 23 OF 91

1

l

5.4 Altemating Suction Filters

5.4.1. Verify that the Cl1-PDIS-N015, Filter Differential Pressure Indicating Switch

is in operation.

5.4.2. Perform the following for the filter to be placed in operation.

1. Open C11-VF1ISA(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) INLET

ISOL VLV.

2. Slowly open DER-V3002(V3004), C11-FLT010A(B) VENT VALVE.

3. When air-free water is vented from the filter, close DER-V3002 (V3004),

C11-FLTO10A(B) VENT VALVE.

4. Slowly open the C11-VF114A(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B)

OUTLET ISOL VLV.

5.4.3. Perform the following for the filter being removed from service.

CAUTION

Backflow through the filter could damage the filter cartridge. Do no.t close C11-VF115A(B)

before closing C11-VF114A(B).

1. Close Cl1-VF114A(B), CRD PMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) OUTLET

ISOL VLV.

2. Verify proper filter operation by observing Cl1-PDIS-N015 is in normal

band.

3. Close Cl1-VF1ISA(B), CRD PUMP SUCT FILTER D010A(B) INLET

ISOL VLV.

5.4.4. Notify Control Room that changeover is complete.

t 5.4.5. In the control room, verify that the pressure and flow of the CRD system are

normal. IE they are not,11Ed use Cl1-R600, CRD HYDRAULICS FLOW  !

l

FLOW CONTROLLER Cl1-F002A/B and Cl1-F003, CRD DRIVE WATER ~

PRESS CONTROL VALVE to obtain a system flow rate as needed to

establish an indicated value for Drive Water Differential Pressure of 250 psid

and a flow rate of 41 to 49 gpm.

SOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 24 OF 91

. _ - _ - . _ - - . - _ - - _ _ - - - - _ - _ - - - - - _ - - - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - - - - - - _ - _ _ - - - _ _ - . _ - - _ - _ ._. - _ - - -

i

I

!

.

i

a

Question 46 Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

>

i

Which of the following is indication that a failure of both Answer: b Accept both answers (a) i

I

seals on one recirculation pump have occurred? and (b).

] a. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and Reference:  ;

t

unidentified leakage will increase.

STM-A0053.01  ;

b. Drywell identified leakage will increase and  ;

,

j unidentified leakage will increase. Comments:  !

!

c. Drywell identified leakage will increase and Response (a) could also be correct. The amount of ,

unidentified leakage will decrease. leakage (where and how detected) depends on the l

, location and severity af the seal failures. [

d. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and

unidentified leakage will decrease. Response (a) would be correct for a catastrophic  !

failure of the outer seal with a minor failure of the  !

j inner seal. In this case, flow to the Drywell l

Equipment Drain Sump (identified leakage ) is  !

reduced due to a drop in pressure between the seals

caused by less resistance to flow into the Drywell  ;

! atmosphere (unidentified leakage). j

.

Response (b) would be correct for a minor failure of

the outer seal. This is due to an increase in pressure  ;

j between the seals where flow to the Drywell  !

Equipment Drain Sump (identified leakage) would

increase with a corresponding increase in leakage to [

the Drywell atmosphere (unidentified leakage) due j l

to the minor failure of the outer seal. j j

! !

<

,

i

.

1.3.5.3 Remote Controls and Indications

The indicators on H13-PNLP680 show the pressure drop across each seal during

normal operation (see Figure 5). During normal operation, No. I seal cavity pressure

should read approximately 10-15 psig greater than RPV pressure, and No. 2 Seal

Cavity pressure should read approximately 1/2 the value of seal cavity No.1. If the

No. I seal has a gross failure, seal cavity No. 2 pressure increases to the value of seal

cavity No. I and RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGING HIGH/ LOW FLOW (H13-

PNLP680) alarms. Should seal No. 2 fail, the RECIRC PUMP A (B) OUTER SEAL

HIGH LEAKAGE annunciator (H13-PNLP680) alarms, the No. 2 Seal Cavity

pressure lowers, and the RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGE HIGH/ LOW FLOW

(H13-PNLP680) alarms.

If both seals fail, the pressure in cavity #1 remains about the same. The pressure of

cavity #2 may go higher or lower depending on which seal is worse. Additionally, at

this point, there is significant seal leakage, which is indicated by a rise in

unidentified leakage. Both the RECIRC PUMP A(B) SEAL STAGING HIGH/ LOW

FLOW annunciator (H13-PNLP680) and the RECIRC PUMP A(B) OUTER SEAL

HIGH LEAKAGE annunciator (H13-PNLP680) alarm.

It is also possible to have a partial seal failure which would cause pressure

indications to respond as described above but not cause an alarm actuation.

1.3.5.4 Automatic Functions

The Reactor Recirculation Pump A(B) Seal Flow Outlet Isolation Valve (B33-

FVF075A(B)) is now operable. The valves are OPEN regardless of switch position if

the respective recire pump is on line. The valves open if OPEN switch is depressed

and the respective pump is off-line. The valves closes when AUTO switch is

depressed and the respective pump is off-line.

1.3.5.5 Power Supplies

N/A

l

l

RBS-1-STM-GPST-A0053.00 PAGE 16 OF 69

053c0022

l

SEAL STAGING VALVE

SEAL LEAKAGE 50 OZNR NORMAL

1 gpm 4 ^ 3.072 OZNR MAXIMUM

T3 M

SEAL STAGING S "'"E" -

LUID OUT 1 GPM NORMAL M UPPER

g

1.4 GPM MAXIMUM ^

P

(1 SEAL FAILED) 2/ SEAL *B"

C.W. IN 20 gPM 66 -t id F

,, ,

1000

+ T2

P e pst LOWER

' SEAL

INJECTION l

s

WATER IN I

J SEAL *A*

3-5 GPM l

AT 60' 100' F HEAT

EXCH. RECIRC

V DISC

4E

'  !

, BEARING

'

C.W. OUT y

f RESTRICT

................' 71 BUSHING

pump r

em j

ia20 PSG AT 535*F

i i

CONDITION A - NORMAL

SEAL STAGING VALVE

SEAL LEAKAGE

gg

I' ' I" LEAKAGE 50 OZHR

SEAL STAGING "T'GHAMBER

LUID OUT 1 GPM NORMAL S

P PRESSURE TAP

p

4

2 SEAL *B"

- - . .' 5 l

'

T THERMO COUPLE

P gh T2 LOWER

SEAL ---- COOLING WATER

'

O REACTOR WATER

CHECK VALVE lI. '

SEAL *A.

CLOSED

HEAT

EXCH. RECIRC m m

DISC sucTON IMCTON

I' "'T ' 50 T

_

m BEARING

T 112 4 issy

, I 2

C.W. OUT , I

RESTRCT ' '"

4 .............. * T1 '

h BUSHING

LOW R.OW _

p, ,a2e pSo ia20pSo

' ^

Q' i Gaw -ouT Pr 510 PSG $10 PSG

4

i

TABLE BASEO ON

INJECTION TEMP = 110 F

~" * * ' ' " ' ' " " ' ' " "

CONDITION B - LOSS OF INJECTION

RECIRCULATION PUMP SEAL FLOWS

RBS-1.STM-A0053.00 FIG 7/TP-08

- . - - . - _ - _ - . - . - - - . - - . . -... . ._-- -

_

N

J

!

the hotwell increases cooling load on RWCU

3

non-regenerative heat exchangers. That increased

,

load will increase the cooling water temperature to

the recire pump seals. This has caused pressure

oscillation of up to 70 psig on second stage seals.

7.' a Drywell

! . . Failure of seals or excessive pump seal leakage will result in

I

increased drywell pressure and increased load on the drywell

coolers.

. Excessive pump seal leakage increases unidentified leakage in

the drywell.

]

7.3.4 Venting

e Inadequate venting of the seals has been a significant problem

!

d

affecting seal life.

l

TP-06 7.3.5 Normal seal cavity pressure indications will show No. I seal

pressure approximately 10-15 psig greater than reactor

pressure.

i

e No. 2 seal pressure will indicate approximately 1/2 the value of

! No. I seal pressure.

.

l OBJ #10 7.4 Technical Specifications applicable to the recirculation system

include:

{ 7.4.1 ATWS Recimulation Pump Trip System Instrumentation

l (3/4.3.4.1).

7.4.2 EOC-RPT System Instrumentation (3/4.3.4.2).

7.4.3 Recimulation Loop (3.4.1.1).

.

l 7.4.4 Jet Pumps (3.4.1.2)

!

! 7.4.5 Recirculation Loop Flow (3.4.1.3)

l

. 7.4.6 Idle Recirculation Loop Startup (3.4.1.4)

OBJ #14 8.0 Pump seal failure

,

8.1 Inner seal failure indications:

2

i TP-06 * This will be indicated by seal No. 2 pressure rising to equal

-

seal No. I pmssure.

'

HLO-005-05 PAGE 26 OF 27

.

, - - -

. . . - .. . . - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ ._ -_. __ _ -- _ ___ -_. __

t

Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

Question 59

Following a normal reactor scram, at what point must the Answer: d Throw out question

At-The-Controls Operator be alert for narrow range reactor since there are 3 possible

water Icvel indication " outgassing" or " notching"? (Assume Reference: GOP-0002 correct answers.

the Reference Leg Backfill system is NOT in service.)

a. If the cooldown rates exceed the Technical Comments:

Specification limits.

Response (a) and (b) are also correct.

b. If the MSIVs close and pressure control is on the

Safety Relief Valves. GOP-0002, P&L 1.29,"If the Reft.rence Backfill

System is not in service, then notching ... may occur

c. When the last Feed Pump is removed from as reactor pressure is lowered. A slow cooldown

service. rate will decrease the effect of degassing the

reference leg."

d. As reactor pressure decreases below 450 psig.

a. To exceed Tech. Spec. limit of 100 F/hr,

pressure would have to decrease rapidly

from 1000psig to below 400psig, and

therefore outgassing could occor.

b. Opening SRVs without EHC system

compensation (MSIVs closed) is also rapid

depressurization (a condition that also

promotes outgassing).

d. industry experience indicates that notching

may occur- 450 psig and the ATC must be

alert.

_ _ - . - _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ __ _- -_._--___- _- ______ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ - - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _

ATTACllMENT I

PAGE 5 OF 24

POWER DECREASE / PLANT SliUTDOWN PERFORMANCE PACKAGE l

9 1.27 During Hot Standby conditions when feedwater flow rate is low, operation of the RWCU

!

I

l

system may cause feedwater line thermal stratification. Feedwater lines may be

monitored for thermal stratification per SOP-0110 TAMARIS TEMPERATURE i

'

SCANNER Display 33. If feedwater line thennal stratification is indicated by a delta

temperature between the top and bottom of the feedwater line of greater than or equal to

100 F refer to SOP-0009 REACTOR FEEDWATER SYSTEM.

1.28 Minimize the time between reactor recirculation pump transfer to slow and stopping the

second reactor feed pump.

-+ 1.29 If the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service, then notching of reactor level

mdication may occur as reactor pressure is lowered. A slow cooldown rate will decrease

the effect of degassing the reference leg.

1.30 if the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service, then a reactor level bias could

develop from degassing of the level reference leg large enough to effect reactor level

trips /isolations.

1.31 Reactivity Controls During Reactor Shutdowns

'

All control rod insertions shall be done using the Shutdown Control Rod

j 1.

Sequence Package unless otherwise recommended by the on-duty reactor

engineer.

2. Reactor power should be reduced with core flow prior to control rod insertions to

minimize fuel duty.

3. If substitute values are entered into the process computer that affect thermal l

limits, the on-duty reactor engineer should update these values as necessary

during power reductions to ensure accurate thermal limit monitoring.

4. Prior to reducing power below the low power setpoint, the on-duty reactor

engineering should verify that all control rods are properly aligned per the BPWS

constraints.

5. The reactor should be scrammed from e power level at which normal pressure

control is available (i.e., turbine control valves open) to preclude inadvertent or

uncontrolled reactivity changes due to reactor cooldown and depressurization.

6. A reactor shutdown by manual control red insertion of all control rods shall not be

pennitted unless specifically authorized by the Operations Superintendent.

)

GOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 10 OF 29

g, ATTACHMENT 1

',J

t

PAGE 7 OF 24

POWER DECREASE / PLANT SIIUTDOWN PERFORMANCE PACKAGE

O  ;

.

STEP INITIALS

1. Notify System Operator prior to decreasing generator load.

% 2. If the Reference Leg Backfill System is not in service per SOP-0001, then have

1&C stage equipment, acquire necessary technicians and obtain PMs to backfill

reactor water level reference legs. (Approximately 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> may be needed to

prepare for backfilling.) Actual backfilling performance may commence when

Operations Shift Superintendent authorizes. (It is desired to have backfilling 4

,

completed prior to reactor pressure reaching 450 psig to counter level indication '

notching possibilities.)

3. Monitor turbine vibration, bearing temperature and differential expansion. l

Turbine Temp & Exoansion RCDR [lTMI-NXR102]

a. Differential Expansion Rotor Long (point 11) between 0.31 inches and

!

0.69 inches. (Refer to ARP-870-54, G08, H08)

b. Rotor Expansion Rotor Long (point 12) between 0.455 inches and 1.545

inches,

h Turbine Vibration RCDR ITMI-NXR1031

l

'

a. Vibration (points I thru 10) between 0 mils and 6 mils.

(Refer to ARP 870-54, D08)

I

Tamaris Comnuter (Display 69,70)

a. Bearing oil temperatures (< setpoint,180 F)

b. Bearing metal temperature (< setpoint,218.7'F)

If unusual indications are observed, initiate hold in power change until those

indications return to normal.

NOTE

Ifcontrol rod movement is required consult the Reactor Engineer before

movement.

4. Decrease reactor and turbine generator power by decreasing reactor recirculation l

flow and/or moving controls rods.

h

GOP-0002 REV - 14 PAGE 12 OF 29

l

_ _. _ _- .._.. _ - _._. _ . _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

l

1.0 PURPOSE

11 To provide instruction to the Operations Section for positioning Root Valves in

the Nuclear Boiler Information System.

I2 To provide input to the Operations Section from the Control and Instrumentation

l

Depanment that the Control and instrumentation Valves associated with the

l

Nuclear Boiler Instruments are aligned so as to place those instruments in service.

I

I3 To provide direction for operating the Reference Leg Backfill System. The

function of the Reference Leg Backfill System is to purge out or keep out

dissolved non-condensible gasses from the reference legs; such that, upon a

depressurization non-condensible gas induced level errors will not occur. This

.

system resolves the issues described in Generic Letter 92-04 and NRC Bulletin 93-

!

03 concerning level errors created by non-condensible gasses coming out of

! solution and causing reference leg water inventory losses.

2.0' PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

i 21 The limitations of this system are includ.ed in Technical Specifications Sections:

2.1.3,2.1.4,2.2.1,3/4.3.1,3/4.3.2,3/4.3.3,3/4.3.4,3/4.3.5.3/4.37.4,3/4.3.7.5,

3/4.3.7.6, 3/4.6.1.6 and 3/4.9.8. j

2.2 Relationship of the Reference Leg Backfill System with Tech Specs:

l 2 2.1 The Reference Leg Backfill System is considered a "suppon system"

for the RPV Water LevelInstruments.

2.2.2 The Reference Leg Backfill System is intended to be used in Operating

Modes 1 through 4; however, once the reactor is depressurized the

backfill system is no longer required to operate.

l

2.2.3 If one channel becomes inoperative or out of service then it should be

i

returned to service within 30 days. If not returned to service within

this time frame then Technical Specifications (3/4.3.1,3/4.3.2,3/4.3.3,

.

3/4.3.4,3/4.3.5) should be consulted for required actions for .n

inoperable reactor water level instrument channel; and a special repon,

justifying continued operation, should be submitted to the NRC by the

end of the 30 days.

1. Compensatory measures as discussed in NRC Bulletin 93-03 may

also be taken (i e. existing methods ofbackfilling/ purging the

l

i reference legs: MCP-4188, 4189, 4190, 4191)

,

SOP-0001 REV-5 PAGE 3 OF 77

. _ _ . _ - - . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ . _ _ _ _

Question 80 Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

Given the following conditions: Answer: b Accept both answers (b)

and (d).

- A plant startup is in progress with the Reactor

Mode Switch in "Startup/ Hot Standby" Reference:

- The Outboard Main Steam isolation Valves have

just been opened and steam line warming is in AOP-0010

progress

- Main condenser vacuum has been established Comments:

- A loss of the "A" RPS Bus has just occurred

Response (d) is also correct.

Ilow will this bus loss affect the plant assuming it has NOT

been restored as directed by AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS Bus," Secetion 1.1,

Bus"? indicates that IAS*MOV106, Cntmt Air Isol. Valve

isolates on a loss of RPS A. When IAS*MOV106

a. The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves will closes this isolates Instrument Air to the

begin to drift close. Containment causing containment instrument air

pressure to decrease eventually bleeding off and

b. Main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease. causing the scram valves to drift open. This will fill

the scram discharge volume. ,

'

c. The Recirculation Pumps will automatically trip.

d. The Scram Discharge Volume will begin filling.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-___-__-____--- _-___ - _____ _ - ______- _ _ - _-__ - _- _ __- --___ _ _ _ _ _ .

. _ - . . - .

!

l

3 AUTOMATIC ACTIONS  !

,

I

3.1 Loss of RPS Bus A

3.1.1. Half scram on Channel A.

3.1.2. Division 1 NSSSS isolation.

3.1.3. Standby Gas Treatment A and Annulus Mixing A start.

3.1.4. Fuel Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment A starts.

3.1.5. Control Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment Train A

starts.

3.1.6. Control Building HVAC A re-aligns to the Charcoal

Ventilation Treatment Train.

3.1.7. CMS H 2Analyzer A auto starts.

  1. 3.1.8. ARC-PI A and ARC-PIB, COND AIR REMOVAL PUMPS

trip.

3.2 Loss of RPS Bus B

3.2.1. Half scram on Channel B.

3.2.2. Division 11 NSSSS isolation.

l

3.2.3. Standby Gas Treatment B and Annulus Mixing B start.

3.2.4. Fuel Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment B starts.

3.2.5. Control Building Charcoal Ventilation Treatment Train B

stans.

3.2.6. Control Building HVAC B re-aligns to the Charcoal  :

Ventilation Treatment Train.  ;

3.2.7. CMS H2Analyzer B auto starts.

1

I

i

i

AOP-0010 REV-9 PAGE 4 OF 19

. - - - - . . - .. . - - - - . - - - . . - - . - . . - .

ATTACIIMENT I

2

PAGE I OF 7

4

SUBSEQUENT OPERATOR ACTIONS FOR LOSS OF RPS BUS A

!

i

. NOTE 1

> Reopening oflifS-MOV106 must be done in a timely

. manner to prevent the Inboard MSIVsfrom closing..

!

l On H13-P601, depress the following to reset the isolation:

( (Initials)

i

e B21H S33,INBD ISOLATION SEAL-IN RESET Pushbutton

j

j . B21H-S32. OUTBD ISOLATION SEAL-IN RESET Pushbutton

2 At H13-P870, reopen the following isolation va!ves

i

i

! RPS A ISOLATED RESTORFD

i

2.1 IAS-MOV106, INST AIR (Initials) (Initials)

OUTBD ISOL

2.2 CCP-MOV138, CONTMT (Initials) (Initials)

SPLY OUTBD ISOL I

2.3 CCP.MOV142, RR PUMP (Initials) (Initials)

CLG SUPPLY.

2.4 CCP-MOV143 RR PUMP (Initials) (Initials) I

CLG DN STREAM RTN i

2.5 CCP-MOVl59, CONTMT RTN (Initials) (Initials)

OUTBD ISOL

3 E CCP is lost to the Reactor Recire Pumps, THEN perform the following:

'

3.1 E there is a significant rise in Reactor Recirc Pump bearing or motor

stator temperatures, THEN manually trip the Reactor Recirc Pumps,

finitials)

!

l

A O P-0010 REV-9 PAGE 7 OF 19 ,

i

- - _ _ . . - . _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ __ . _ _ _ _ .

Question 89 Key Answer / Comments Recommendations

Given the following conditions:

Answer: a Throw out question.

- a reactor and plant startup is in progress with power inappropriate from

at 2% memory knowledge

- RPV pressure is 800 psig Reference: item.

- The Reactor Mode Switch is in "Startup/Ilot

Standby" Tech Spec 3.1.5

- The "A" CRD Pump hasjust tripped

- The "B" CRD Pump is baing lined up for a start Comments:

- Scram accumulator 32-41 trouble alarm is in and has

been verified to be from low pressure (indicating This question is too detailed for a "from memory"

1500 psig) knowledge item. It is requiring the candidate to

know, from memory, a NOTE within the Technical

Which of the following will the Control Room Supervisor Specifications, as compared to a required action

(CRS) use to make the . rmination on declaring control rod item associated with a Limiting Condition for

32-41 " Slow" or " Inoperable"? (Note: No other accumulator Operation (LCO) with an action less than I hour.

trouble alamis are in.) Typically Notes within the Technical

Specifications do not need to be treated similar to

ne determination is based upon: Notes within the EOPs (which are expected

memory knowledge items) requiring prompt

a. the control rods' last scram time surveillance interpretation and acGon.

results.

b. the time charging water header pressure will be

less than 1520 psig.

c. the number of control rods fully withdrawn.

d. drive water pressure availability to fully insen the

control rod.

.

.- - _ - - . ____-_.__.-__._..-___.--_.._.___.-__--_--____-a.____ _ _ _ - _ _ - . .- - - - - - . - - _ - _ - - - - - _ _ _ - - _ _ - - _ - _ _ - - _ - - _ _ - _ _ _ _ - - - _ . - - - - - - = - - - _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ -

Control Rod Scr.im Accumulators

3.1.5

3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS

3.1.5 Control Rod Scram Accumulators

LC0 3.1.5 Each control rod scram accumulator shall be OPERABLE.

APPLICABILITY: MODES I and 2.

ACTIONS

....................................-NOTE-----------------------------------..

Separate Condition entry is allowed for each control rod scram accumulator.

..............................................................................

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

_ A. One control rod scram A.1 --------NOTE--------

accumu'lator inoperable Only applicable if

with reactor steam the associated

dome pressure control rod scram

a 600 psig, time was within the

limits of

Table 3.1.4-1 during

the last scram time

Surveillance.

....................

Declare the 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />

associated control

rod scram time

" slow."

O_R

_

i

A.2 Declare the 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />

associated control

rod inoperabic.

(continued)

RIVER BEND 3.1-15 Amendment No. 81'

.

i l

ATTACHMENT 4

FINAL WRITTEN EXAMINATION AND Afv$WER KEY

l

l

l

4

l

}

l

l

l

s

!

l

a

n

4

i

!

4

. . . - _ . . _ ____- ._. _ . _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ - . _ _ . - - _ _ . . - _ -

,

RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)

~001 b

- .. .

002 d

l

003 b

004 a

005 a

006 b

007 a

008 c

009 b

010 c

l

011 b

012 c

013 d ,

I

014 d j

015 #C i

016 a

017 d

018 c

019 d

020 d

Page1of5

I

,

RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)

021 h l

022 e

023 a-

024 a

025 a

026 d

027 a ab

028 c

029 d

030 h

031 h

.032 c-

033 c

034 X T eje E

035 a

036 d

037 b

038 c

039 d

040 a

Page 2 of 5

i

. . . . . _ . _ __. _ _ _ _ . . - _ _ . _ . . . _ . . _ _ . . _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ . . . _ _ _ . . . _

_ .

RIVER BEND EXAM ANav exwhi

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)

041 .# Pd < he , ,

042 a

043 c

044 e

045 b

046 b s% C

047 c

048 b

049 a

050 b

'

051 c

052 d

1

053 d l

1

054 b  ;

055 a j

056 e

j

l 057 b

058 a

'

059 F 3 .e. k a f o

t

.

060 b

I

Page 3 of 5

i

l

>

.-

. _ . . . _ _ _ . _ _ . _ . . _ . _ _ - - _ . _ . . _ _ _ . . . _ _ _ _ . . . _ . _ . _ . _ _ _ _ . _ .

i.

a

4 i

RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY l

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97)

4

b

061 a

'

062 d'

'

i

063 h

.

1

064 d

't

- .

-

065 h

066 d

t

'

1 067 h

'

068 h

i i

4

069 e.  ;

i 070 e 3

4

071 c
1

4

072 b

i

I 073 d

074 b

l

1

075 e

,

.!

j 076 d i

)

!

j 077 a l

'

3

!!

, 078 a

i I

i

079 d

)

4

-

080 b i

j Page 4 of 5

4

,

<

RIVER BEND EXAM ANSWER KEY

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR (01/97) ,

081 c

082 h

083 h  ;

I

084 h

085- c

086 c

087 c

088 a

089 a

090 d

091 a

092 a i

!

093 d

l

094 a i

095 c I

i

096 c

097 c

098 b

099 b

100 b

Page 5 of 5

.

RIVER BEND

SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR

NRC WRITTEN EXAMINATION

,

i

1

RESTRICTED INFORMATION

OFFICIAL USE ONLY

!

RIVER BEND SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR NRC EXAMINATION

l

FACILITY: River Bend i

REACTOR TYPE: BWR-GE6

DATE ADMINISTERED: 01/27/97

CANDIDATE:

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE:

Use the supplied answer sheet for documentation ofyour answers. There are 100 multiple

choice questions on this examination, each worth 1.00 point. Passing grade for this

examination consists of an overall score of 80%. Examination papers will be picked up

four (4) hours after the examination begins.

100

TOTAL POINTS CANDIDATE'S SCORE PERCENT

All work on this examination is my own. I have neither given nor received aid.

Candidate's Signature

1

i

. - . . - . . - . -- .

NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS

During the administration of this examination, the following rules apply:

1. Cheating on the examination will result in a denial of your application and could result J

in more severe penalties.

1

2 After you complete the examination, sign the statement on the cover sheet indicating l

that the work is your own and you have not received or given assistance in completing l

the examination.

3 To pass the examination, you must achieve a grade of 80 percent or greater.

4 The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question

number.

5. There is a time limit of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> for completing the examination.

6. Use only black ink or dark pencil to ensure legible copies.

I

7. Print your name in the blank provided on the examination cover sheet and on all

answer sheet pages.

!

8. Mark your answers on the answer sheet provided and do not leave any question blank. l

1

9. If the intent of a question is unclear, ask questions of the examiner only.

10. Restroom trips are permitted, but only one applicant at a time will be allowed to leave.

Avoid all contact with anyone outside the examination room to eliminate even the

appearance or possibility of cheating.

I 1. When you complete the examination, assemble a package including the examination

questions, examination aids, and answer sheets and give it to the examiner or proctor.

Remember to sign the statement on the examination cover sheet.

12. After you have turned in your examination, leave the examination area as defmed by

the examiner.

_

i

I QUESTION:

Following Classification of an Emergency Event, what are the time interval guidelines for

making NOTIFICATIONS to State and Local Authorities of the emergency

classification?

Notification must be made:

a. immediately.

b. within 15 minutes.

c. within 30 minutes.

d. within 60 minutes.

2 QUESTION:

SELECT the conditions under which the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) may

concurrently fill the Shift Technical Advisor (STA) position.

The CRS may fill the STA position:

a. provided that he remains in the main Control Room.

b. while in Modes 1,2 and 3 if the Operations Shift Superintendent remains in

the Main Control Room.

c. only when the plant is operating imder steady state conditions NOT requiring

the Administrative CRS to be stationed.

d. provided that there are a total of five (5) licensed operators currently on shift.

. .. . .

.

3 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is shutdown for a refueling and maintenance outage

- A Senior Reactor Operator licensed individual has been working more than 12-

hours per day during his off-shift days coordinating procedure changes for the

outage plant modifications

- He is scheduled to retum to shift Saturday at 6:00am as the dayshift Control

Room Supervisor

What is the LATEST time he may work on the Friday before he takes the shift as CRS?

( Assume that he has not exceeded any overtime restrictions.) i

a. 10:00pm

b. 6:00pm

c. 2:00pm

d. 6:00am

4 QUESTION:

A currently licensed Senior Reactor Operator (SRO) has started wearing glasses.

Which of the following individuals is responsible for ensuring the proper notifications are )

made to the NRC regarding modifying the SRO's license? l

a. The Senior Reactor Operator

b. The Operations Superintendent

c. The General Manager, Plant Operations

d. The Manager, Training

.

l

l

5 QUESTION:

Which of the fcilowing permission / notification requirements must be met for an

INTENTIONAL entry into Tech Spec 3.0.3?

Permission must be obtained from the:

a. Operations Superintendent and the NRC Resident Inspector notified,

b. General Manager - Plant Operations and the NRC Resident inspector notified.

c. Manager - Operations and a 1-hour report made to the NRC.

d. General Manager - Plant Operations and a 4-hour report made to the NRC.

6 QUESTION:

Given the folcwving conditions:

- Testing is in progress that requires use of a Human Tag

- It is anticipated that the test will require 5 more hours for completion

- Current time is 4:00pm

flow much longer may this Human Tag continue?

a. Ihour

b. 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />

c. 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />

d. 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />

_ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ -_ _ _ _ __ . _ _ . _ . _ . __ _ ._._.._. .._ _. __. _ _ _ _ _ .

7 QUESTION:

Given the following information for a fully qualified, male River Bend radiation worker:

.

- 1997 Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) at River Bend as of 05/15/97 is

I 550 mrem

- This individual spent 5 weeks in March and April of this year (1997) at the

l

I Clinton Power Station

- River Bend Radiation Protection has not yet received his radiation exposure

information from Clinton

L

,

i What is the MAXIMUM Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) that he can receive at

River Bend for the remainder of 1997 WITilOUT any additional approvals? ,

<

'

a. 1450 mrem

b. 1950 mrem

c. 2000 mrem

d. 2500 mrem

l

l

l

1

i

{

>

- - _- . .. .. .. - - . . . - - -. . - - . . . . - ..

l

8 QUESTION: ,

Given the following conditions:

i

- The plant is operating at 95% power 1

- A VALID high reactor pressure condition has just occurred i

I

- The reactor did NOT scram

!

l

1

The At-The-Controls Operator should

a. infonn the Control Room Supervisor of the condition and insert a manual

reactor scram when ordered.

b. not insert a manual reactor scram unless the high pressure condition is

sustained.

c. insert a manual reactor scram and inform the Control Room Supervisor of the i

I

condition and action taken.

d. perform an immediate power reduction to reduce pressure below the high l

pressure scram setpoint as soon as possible.

_ _. . _ - - _ . . ._ _ _ _ _ -

9 QUESTION:

,

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 100% power

- It has just been discovered that a weekly surveillance was not accomplished

within its specified frequency.

-

- It should have been completed three (3) days ago

Which of the following describes the requirements regarding the associated equipment's

Operability status?

l

The equipment:

a. may be considered to be Operable for the surveillance grace period (1.75 days)

to allow the surveillance to be performed.

b. may be considered to be Operable for a maximum period of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to allow

the surveillance to be performed.

c. must have a Safety Function Operability Determination performed within 6

hours.

d. must be declared Inoperable immediately but may be retumed to service for

performance of the surveillance.  ;

!

l

t

s'

1

4

.

_ __ __ .- _- ____. . - _ _ __ .

l

l

1

l

10 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

! i

l - The plant is shutdown with all rods fully inserted j

'

- Shutdown cooling is in service with a reactor temperature of 230 *F

- The Operations Shift Superintendent (OSS) has been scheduled to attend a 30  !

i

I

minute outage meeting outside the Main Control Room

! i

! Which of the following describes how the control room command function may be I

!

maintained during this meeting?

a. The OSS may turnover the command function to the Unit Operator or At-The-

Controls Operator,

b. If he is no further than 10 minutes from the Main Control Room the OSS may

retain the command function.  ;

1

!

c. The OSS must turnover the command function to another individual with a

Senior Reactor Operators license. i

d. The Administrative Control Room Supervisor (with an inactive license) may

assume the command function once the plant is less than 200 F.

l

11 QUESTION:

EQUIPMENT OUT OF SERVICE signs should be placed next to:

a. automatic initiation pushbutton(s) for an out of service system.

b. controls for equipment required to be maintained operable,

c. equipment that is necessary for operation of out of service system.

d. devices used to isolate the equipment out of service.

4

. . . _ . . _

. _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _____ ___ _ ___.. ______

i

i

12 QUESTION: 1

Given the following conditions:

i

- Preparations are in progress for a reactor and plant startup l

- All control rods are fully insened l

- Reactor coolant temperature is 192 F

- Both Recirculation Pumps are running in " slow" speed

At what point in the startup process are the control board lineups for safety-related

systems (OSP-0017) required to be perforrned?

l

The lineups shall be performed:

l a. after the Mode Switch is placed in "Startup/ Hot Standby" but before control

rod withdrawals commence.

t

'

b. prior to reaching the point of adding heat with reactor power. j

c. prior to reactor coolant temperature exceeding 200 F j

i

l

d. at the same time the Administrative Control Room Supervisor is stationed. i

l

4

I

l 13 QUESTION:

,

Following the decision to implement AOP-0031," Shutdown From Outside The Main

i Control Room", where must the Operations Shift Superintendent report?

a. Division I Remote Shutdown Panel

b. Division 11 Remote Shutdown Panel

i

c. Operations Suppon Center

l

l d. Technical Support Center

l

1

i

. -

14 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- A loss of coolant accident has occurred '

- Fuel damage is suspected but has not yet been confirmed

- The emergency response organization has been activated and the State and local

authorities have been notified

Which of the following meets the definition of a ' release" for the purposes of offsite

notifications?

Any monitored plant effluent path is at its higit alarm setpoint. j

a.

b. Two or more monitored plant effluent paths are at least three (3) times their

normal readings.

c. The fuel damage has been confirmed by reactor coolant sampling.

d. A release is detected using radiation monitoring teams with portable monitors.

1

15 QUESTION:

l

During performance of flow balance surveillance testing on the Normal Service Water

I

System, several valves that are normally full open need to be throttled for the duration of

the test.

Which of the following describes how the change in status of these valve will be tracked?

a. The throttle valve computerized listing will be updated and a Change Notice

(CN) for the valve realignment will be completed for SOP-0018," Normal

Service Water".

b. A Procedure Revision for the valve realignment will be completed for SOP-

0018," Normal Service Water" and an entry made in the Control Room log.

c. The repositioning of the valves will be documented per the guidance in ADM-

'

0022," Conduct of Operations".

J

d. The repositioning of the valves will be controlled by tracking all

manipulations as required in the surveillance test package.

l

l

i

l

16 QUESTION:

Which of the following describes how an independent verification is perfonned on a l

!

valve that is already " locked open" per a valve lineup?

The independent verifier shall:

a. verify the locking device is in place as required.

b. remove the locking device, verify the valve is fully open and reinstall the

locking device.

c. attempt to move the valve in the " closed" direction to verify the locking

devic > bnlds the valve open.

d. have another individual verify the position and then verify the locking device

installed.

1

l

>

17 QUESTION:

Which of the following controls are required when a freeze seal is being utilized as an

isolation point for a scheduled maintenance activity?

a. A Dedicated Operator from Operations shall be stationed at the freeze seal to

monitor it and to isolate the system should the seal fail.

b. An Operator Aid Caution Tag shall be posted in the Main Control Room on

the system being isolated by the freeze seal.

c. A Danger - Hold tag shall be hung at the freeze seal location prior to the seal

being established.

d. The Operations Shift Superintendent shall brief the operating crew on the

freeze seal, including contingency actions should the freeze seal fail.

l

!

l

. . _- .. . .. . .

18 QUESTION:

The plant is was initially operating at 100% power. A transient occurred resulting in the

following conditions:

-RPV level is 36 inches and stable

-Reactor power is 74% and stable

-Total core flow is 50.5 E6 lbm/hr. and stable

The cause of this plant configuration was the receipt of a signal from the:

a. EOC-RPT logic.

b. recirculation pump cavitation interlock circuitry.

c. recirculatien flow control valve runback logic.

d. ATWS/ARIlogic.

19 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

i

- The High Pressure Core Spray (HPCS) system is operating and injecting into the

reactor vessel following a valid initiation signal.

- All Narrow Range Reactor Water Level Instrumentation has failed " UPSCALE"

l Which of the following de ,cribrohe status of the HPCS system following the

instrument failure?

.

l

t

'

HPCS Pump Injection valve F004 Minimum Flow F012

a. Running Open Closed

b. Tripped Open Closed

c. Tripped Closed Open

d. Running Closed Open

!

4

1

i

l

!

! 20 QUESTION:

! Given the following conditions:

- Due to a leak, drywell temperature is increasing

,

- Conditions have exceeded the Safe Zone of the RPV Saturation Temperature

Cune.

Which of the following describes the availability of the Wide Range RPV water level

indication?

I

Wide Range level indication:

a. can be used for determination of actual RPV water level only if the indicator

reads above its minimum indicated level.

b. may be used for trending RPV water level changes but not for determination

l

cf actual level

,

c. can be used for trending RPV water levels only if the indicator reads above its

specified minimum indicated level.

d. may not be used for either trending or for determination of RPV water level.

1

I

l

l

l

l

1

.

!

l

!

l.

. .. - . _ . _ _ . - - .. __ _ - . . - _ - .

l

l

21 QUESTION:

\

l

Given the following conditions:

l

,

- A reactor startup is in progress 1

- Control rod 16-25 has just been withdrawn ONE notch (Notch I8 to 20)

- The Rod Motion control " Withdraw" pushbutton on the Operator Control

Module was used for the withdrawal

- The Rod Control & Information System operated as designed during the i

withdrawal f

SELECT the point in the rod withdrawal sequence when the white " Settle" light would be l

'

expected to extinguish.

a. The Rod Motion control " Withdraw" pushbutton has just been released. l

l

.

b. The hydraulic control unit withdraw exhaust directional control valve hasjust i

closed.

c. The white "Out" light on the Rod Motion Matrix has just extinguished. I

d. The control rod digital position display on the Core Map Display is

indicating "- "

? .

l

l

,

d

<

J

_ _

.- - . .. - - , - _ - . . _ = . __ - -. -

!

! 22 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant had been operating at 100% power

- A severe over-pressure transient resulted m ALL Safety Relief Valves (SRV)

-

opening in the " relief" mode and then lifting in their " safety" mode

- RPV pressure peaked at 1200 psig

- All valves have closed (reseated) with the exception of one SRV that remains

open in its " safety" mode

- The required actions of AOP-0035," Safety Relief Valve Stuck Open", have

been taken including scramming the reactor but the SRV has not closed.

Which of the following describes the resulting tailpipe temperature trend as the plant

cools down and depressurizes through the stuck open SRV? (Assume containment

pressure is 0 psig and remains constant.)

SRV tailpipe temperature will:

a. start at 260 "F, rise to approximately 290 F and then will slowly fall

following reactor pressure during the depressurization below 500 psig.

I

l

b. start at 525 F and will slowly fall following reactor pressure during the l

.

depressurization.

c. start at 285 F, rise to approximately 325 *F and then will slowly fall

following reactor pressure during the depressurization below 500 psig.

d. start at 305 F and will slowly fall following reactor pressure during the

depressurization.

l

l

l

l

!

I

I

.

l

I

t

( 23 QUESTION

Given the following conditions:

- The plant has experienced a reactor scram and Main Steam Isolation Valve

(MSIV) closure from 75% power

- Reactor pressure control is by periodic operation of the Safety Relief Valves

J

(SRV)

Which of the following is an indication that one of the SRV tailpipe vacuum breakers f

'

has failed in the "OPEN" position during SRV operation?

a. An increase in indicated suppression pool water level each time the SRV

opens.

b. Direct pressurization of the containment each time the SRV opens.

c. Steam bypassing the SRV discharge quenchers with a direct piped path into

the suppression pool.

d. Suppression pool water being drawn up into the tailpipe after SRV closure.

24 QUESTION:

Suppression pool temperature is limited to 100*F during normal operations.

Which of the following is an approved exception to this limit?

a. The limit maybe increased to 110 F with the MSIVs closed following a

reactor scram (all control rods fully inserted).

b. Suppression pool temperature is allowed to reach 110*F while testing RCIC

during normal plant operations.

c. The limit maybe increased above 120*F if reactor pressure is less than 300

psig.

d. Suppression pool temperature is allowed to reach 120*F after a Safety Relief

Valve actuation.

_. _ __ _ _ _ . _ _____ . __ __ _ _ . _ _ .. . .

i

25 QUESTION:

+

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 45% power

- A VALID high steam flow signal is sensed in the "B" Main Steam Line

- Steam flows in the remaining lines are nonnal

Which of the following describes the expected AUTOMATIC response of the

Containment And Reactor Vessel Isolation Control System (CRVICS) to this event?

a. A Group 6 (MSIV & MSL Drains) containment isolation signal will result.

b. Only Channel"B" of the CRVICS MSIV isolation logic will de-energize.

c. One solenoid on ea:h MSIV will de-energize but no valve closures will occur.

d. Only the inboard and outboard MSIVs in the "B" main steam line will close.

l

l

t

!

l

<

r

- - _ . . . _

l

I

26 QUESTION:

1

i

l Given the following conditions:

- The plant is performing a reactor and plant startup

- Reactor power is 5.5 E4 counts per second (cps) on the Source Range

Monitoring (SRM) instrumentation and is increasing

Which of the following describes how a SRM detector that cannot be fully withdrawn

affects continued control rod withdrawals? Assume the stuck SRM Channel is NOT

bypassed.

Control rod withdrawals will be possible:

a. because the control rod withdrawal block logic is one-out-of-two-taken twice

for SRM detectors.

b. as soon as the three fully withdrawn SRM detector power levels are all less

than 100 cps.

c. until power reaches 1.0 E5 cps and then will not be allowed until associated

IRM power is at or above Range 3.

d. until power reaches 1.0 E5 cps and then will not be allowed until associated

IRM power is at or above Range 8.

i

I

,

27 QUESTION:  !

Follawing an actuation of Alternate Rod Insertion (ARI) from 100% power, how can the '

operator detennine if the actuation was " automatic" or " manual"?

The operator should check the:

a. status of the Recirculation Pumps.

! b. position of the backup scram valves.

c. final pressure in the scram air header.

d. status of the ARI solenoid valves.

i

!

. . - - -

l

28 QUESTION:

The "B" Standby Liquid Control (SLC) Squib Valve (F004B) continuity meter in P642 is l

reading 4.95 milliamps.

1

What are the appropriate actions for these conditions?

a. Declare the "B" SLC system Inoperable as this current value ind: cates the

squib ignitor has decomposed.

1

I

b. Declare the "B" SLC system Inoperable as this current value '.ndicates the j

squib valve has fired.

c. Take no action as this is the normal continuity current for the squib valve

ignitor circuit.

d. Direct troubleshooting of the "B" SLC system as the current should be no ,

'

lower than 2 amps.

'

29 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- All four Automatic Depressurization System (ADS) manual initiation

pushbuttons have been armed, depressed, and released

- No ADS valves opened

Which of the following describes what must now occur to open the ADS Safety Relief

Valves?

'

a. The 105 second timer must time out.

b. The 105 second timer must time out AND the ADS manualinitiation

pushbuttons must be depressed again.

c. One low pressure ECCS pump per division must be started.

d. One low pressure ECCS pump must be started AND the ADS manual

initiation pushbuttons must be depressed again.

- . _ .- . , - - . _ _ - .. . . . . - .

30 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- LPCS System Inoperative alarm has been received

- The Low Pressure Core Spray (LPCS) Line Break status light (postage stamp) is

illuminated

l

Which of the following describes the location of the break?

The break is in the:

l

l

a. Drywell between the LPCS Testable Check Valve (F006) and the LPCS

Injection Valve (F005).

l b. reactor pressure vessel downcomer area.

,

c. Auxiliary Building between the LPCS Testable Check Valve (F006) and the

LPCS Injection Valve (F005).

1

'

d. area inside the core shroud bypassing the Low Pressure Core Spray sparger.

i

I

l

l

.

-,. . . - .

. - ._

31 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The Low Pressure Core Spray (LPCS) system is running in the test return to the

suppression pool mode

- A leak has caused drywell pressure to increase to 1.95 psig

- Reactor water level is -62 inches

- Reactor pressure is 750 psig

Select the expected AUTOMATIC response of the LPCS system.

a. The LPCS Pump trips, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012)

closes, the pump restarts and the Injection Isolation Valve (F005) opens.

b. The Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012) closes and the LPCS

Pump continues to run on minimum flow.

c. The LPCS Pump trips, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool (F012)

closes, the pump restarts and runs on minimum flow.

,

d. The LPCS Pump continues to run, the Test Return Valve To Suppression Pool

(F012) closes and the Injection isolation Valve (F005) opens.

32 QUESTION:

Which of the following describes how the Residual Heat Removal (RHR) Heat

Exchanger Bypass Valves (F048A & B) should be positioned after an ECCS initiation

signal?

F048A & B should be:

I

a. overridden and closed if suppression pool temperature reaches 100 *F and

EOP-2," Primary Containment Control" is entered.

b. overridden and closed once full injection flow has been established.

c. closed as directed by the Emergency Operating Procedures 10 minutes after

the initiation signal.

d. left open to provide maximum Low Pressure Coolant Injection (LPCI) flow.

33 QUESTION:

Which of the items below describes the response of the Rod Control and Information

System when the DRIFT TEST pushbutton is depressed at the Operator Control Module

(OCM)?

When the DRIFT TEST pushbutton is depressed:

a. red LED drift lights will lite for all rods not at a latched position.

b. a drift signal will be generated for the selected control rod.

c. an artificial drift condition will be induced when the selected rod is moved.

d. the drift circuitry will be verified operable by initiating a drift alarm.

l

!

.. - . _ - -. . - - - - _ - . _ . - - -. . .-

l

34 QUESTION:

l Given the following conditions:

l

l

- The llPCS Diesel Generator had been in a normal standby lineup

- An automatic start signal hasjust been received

- The diesel generator has responded as designed

- it has been determined that NO VALID start signal condition exists

What are the required IMMEDIATE actions for these conditions?

a. Depress the local panel Emergency Stop pushbutton and place the Engine

Mode Control Switch in " TEST".

b. Depress the Main Control Room Emergency Stop pushbutton and direct the

local operator to place the Engine Mode Control switch in "MAINT".

c. Place the Diesel Generator Mode Switch to " LOCAL MANUAL" and direct

the local operator to place the Diesel Generator Control switch to "STOP".

d. Verify the Diesel Generator Mode Switch in " REMOTE MANUAL" and

place the Main Control Room Diesel Generator Control switch to "STOP"

l

l

i

_

.

.

.

_.

l

'

l

\

35 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:  ;

l

- A 4160 V ITE type breaker was racked in following maintenance on its

associated pump j

- The breaker is currently closed

- A loss of DC control power to that breaker occurs

- No operator actions are taken

Which of the following describes the operational capabilities of this breaker?

a. The breaker cannot be remotely operated but can be locally tripped, then

closed and tripped open one more time.

b. The breaker will trip open on loss of control power and all additional breaker

operations must be performed locally.  :

c. The breaker will trip open on loss of control power and no further breaker

operations are possible.

d. The breaker cannot be remotely operated but can be locally tripped one time

with no further operation possible.

!

l

.

___ _ . _ __- _ ._ __ _

l

'

!

! 36 QUESTION:

l

Gisen the following conditions:

l

1

- The plant is operating at 95% power

- The "B" EllC Pressure Regulator is in " TEST"

- The "A" EHC Pressure Regulator output has failed "AS-IS"

l

- The At-The-Controls Operator begins a power reduction using recirculation

now

Which of the following would be the expected response of EHC for this failure?

a. The Maximum Combined Flow Limiter will limit the magnitude of the

pressure error signal generated as power decreases.

b. The Turbine Control Valves will open attempting to maintain the selected

pressure setpoint as reactor power and pressure decrease.

c. The Maximum Combined Flow Limiter will close the Main Turbine Bypass

Valves to control pressure at the setpoint,

d. The Turbine Control Valves will not move, however, turbine load will

decrease as reactor pressure follows the power reduction

37 QUESTION:

Which of the following plant systems is required to be Operable to support the

Operability requirements of Secondary Containment?

a. Combustible Gas Control

b. Standby Gas Treatment System

c. Penetration Valve And Main Steam Isolation Valve-Leakage Control Systems

! d. Leak Detection System

.

1

38 QUESTION:

The Average Power Range Monitoring (APRM) Gain Adjustment Factor (GAF) value for

APRM Channel "B" is 0.989, with Core Thermal Power at 100%.

Select the current condition of this APRM channel and the appropriate actions for that

condition.

a. Actual power is greater than indicated power and a GAF adjustment is

required. )

i

I

b. A conservative condition exists but a GAF adjustment is required.

c. Indicated reactor power is greater than actual power and a GAF adjustment is

NOT required.

d. A non-conservative condition exists but GAF adjustment is NOT required.

39 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The High Pressure Cr. 5 pray (HPCS) system is running in the CST to CST ,

mode l

l

- While the pump is running an i&C Technician's error results in a low CST

j

water level signal l

l

Which of the following PREVENTS pumping suppression pool water into the CST for

these conditions?

a. The HPCS Pump will trip as soon as the Suppression Pool Suction Valve

(F015) begins to open with HPCS in the CST to CST mode.

b. The HPCS low CST water level automatic swap to the suppression pool is

overridden with HPCS in the CST to CST mode.

c. The operator must take immediate action to close the Test Bypass Valve To

CST (F010) and Test Return Valve To CST (F011).

d. The Test Bypass Valve To CST (F010) and Test Return Valve To CST (F0ll)

both close as the Suppression Pool Suction Valve (F015) begins to open.

_ . .. .. - ._ .. . . .

l

'

'

40 QUESTION:

A turbine load set runback will NOT occur on a load reject if the plant is operating at or l

below 40%.  ;

!

'

.

SELECT the parameter used as input to the load reject circuitry for the determination of

i

plant power.

a. High pressure turbine exhaust pressure.

1

b. High pressure turbine first stage pressure.

I

c. Main generator power output (MWe).

d. Main generator current output (amps).

.

t

41 QUESTION:  ;

Prior to a startup with the plant in a cold, depressurized condition, the Unit Operator

adjusts the Control Rod Drive Hydraulic (CRD) system Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to

maintain 250 psid between drive water header pressure and reactor pressure.

l

How is this pressure differential maintained as reactor pressure increases during the

ensuing startup to 100% power? (Assmn- the CRD system is operating as designed.) l

l

I

As reactor pressure increases during the startup:

a. the Pressure Control Valve automatically operates to maintain CRD system

pressure above reactor pressure.

b. the Unit Operator must periodically open the Pressure Control Valve to

maintain the required differential pressure.

c. the Flow Control Valve automatically opens to maintain a constant flow,

therefore a constant d/p across the PCV. i

d. the Unit Operator must periodically adjust the Flow Control Valve to maintain

CRD system pressure above reactor pressure.

l

!

.. _ _ _

i

42 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions: .

,

- The plant is performing a scheduled shut 6mn

- Intermediate Range Monitoring (IRM) cbnnel "H" has failed " UPSCALE" and

has NOT been bypassed

At what point would an automatic half scram be expected for these conditions?

a. The plant enters Mode 2.

b. APRM "H" reaches 5% power.

c. The IRM detectors are fully inserted.

d. Power has decreased to the Low Power Setpoint.

43 QUESTION:

Which of the following would be an indication of a DECREASE in the efficiency of the

Offgas system catalytic recombiners?

,

a. Main Condenser vacuum will decrease. l

b. Offgas recombiner temperatures will increase.

c. OfTgas system total flow volume will increase.

d. Offgas system discharge radiation levels due to Nitrogen-16 will a3 crease.

I

'

l

i

l

I

i

I

. _ _ ._. ..

!

44 QUESTION: l

Given the following conditions:

1

-

- The plant is operating at 50% power

- The Main Seal Oil Pump has just tripped

- The Emergency Seal Oil Pump did not start

Which of the following describes the required actions for the above conditions?

.

a. An immediate generator and turbine trip is required.

i

b. A rapid power reduction to less than 25% is required.

l

c. Begin load reduction for main generator purge.

"

d. Hydrogen pressure should be reduced to approximately 40 psig.

!

l

'

45 QUESTION:

The following is the current Rod Control & Information System display data for control l

'

rod 28-25 that had been at Notch "48". (Note that the LEDs will illuminate /not

illuminate when the appropriate switches are depressed, as required.) l

' - FullIn: Illuminated

- Full Out: NOT Illuminated

4 - Drift: Illuminated

- Selected: NOT liluminated

- Accum Fault: NOT liluminated

- Scram: NOT Illuminated

,

Which of the following has occurred?

a. The control rod was driven to Notch "00" using the " Insert" pushbutton.

b. The Scram Outlet Valve (127) ONLY opened.

c. The Scram Inlet Valve (126) ONLY opened.

d. BOTH the Scram inlet (126) and Outlet Valves (127) have opened.

l

l

l

46 QUESTION:

Which of the following is indication that a failure of both seals on one recirculation pump

have occurred?

a. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and unidentified leakage will )

increase. l

b. Drywell identified leakage will increase and unidentified leakage will

increase.

c. Drywell identified leakage will increase and unidentified leakage will

decrease.

d. Drywell identified leakage will decrease and unidentified leakage will

decrease.

l

47 QUESTION:

1

Given the following conditions: l

!

- The plant is performing a reactor startup and heatup

- Reactor water level control is via the Reactor Water Cleanup (RWCU) system

rejecting to the main condenser

- Main condenser vacuum has been established with the Mechanical Vacuum

Pumps

Which of the following is the reason for limiting reject flowrate for these conditions?

Discharging water to the main condenser at a vacuum:

a. with excessive flowrates can exceed the design capacity of the mechanical

vacuum pumps.

b. may cause a RWCU pump trip due to high flowrates through the system.

c. can exceed the Reactor Plant Component Cooling Water system heat removal

capabilities for the non-regenerative heat exchanger,

d. will cause damage to the filter-demin resin strainers and resin " channeling"

from high flowrates.

- _ - _ . _ __ . . _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ ._.

48 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- A plant startup is in progress

- The main turbine is rolling at 1050 rpm with "1500" rpm selected at the

" medium" starting rate l

- The At The-Controls Operator reports the acceleration rate of the turbine is

approximately 180 rpm

Which of the following describes the current main turbine /EHC operation?

,

a. A loss of both EHC speed signals has occurred.

b. A loss of one of the EHC speed signals has occurred.

1

c. The turbine is accelerating at the appropriate rate as selected by the speed

control unit.

l

d. The wobulator circuit is starting to vary acceleration rate as turbine speed

approaches 1500 rpm.

l

l

! I

'

,

f

1

i

.

49 QUESTION:

l

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 50% power

Main Steam Isolation Valve (MSIV) partial stroke testing is in progress  !

- The inboard MSIV on the "D" Main Steam Line (MSL)is being tested with the

" TEST" pushbutton

- While the MSIV is stroking in the closed direction, power is lost to the test

solenoid

Which of the following describes how this MSIV will be affected?

The Inboard MSIV on the "D" MSL:

a. will immediately reopen with no operator action.

b. can be reopened with the normal control switch,

c. will reopen over 4 minutes as the air bleeds off the top of the operating piston.

d. will fully close and cannot be reopened until power is restored.

i

l

l

- -- . _ . . . - .-

I 50 QUESTION:

The RilR S/D Cooling Isolation Valve Enable / Disable switch on the local panel (P001)

'

has two positions," Enable / Disable"

-

Which of the following describes when the switch is REQUIRED to be in " Disable" and

the effect on the operation of Shutdown Cooling when it is in this position?

'

The RHR S/D Cooling Isolation Valve Enable / Disable switch is placed in " Disable"

when:

a. reactor pressure is greater than 135 psig and prevents operation of the RHR

Shutdown Cooling Inboard Isolation Valve (F009) from the Main Control

Room.

b. reactor pressure is greater than 135 psig and prevents operation of the RHR

Shutdown Cooling Outboard Isolation Valve (F008) from the Main Control

Room.

c. evacuating the Main Control Room to allow local operation of the RHR

Shutdown Cooling Inboard Isolation Valve (F009).

d. evacuating the Main Control Room to allow local operation of the RHR

Shutdown Cooling Outboard Isolation Valve (F008).

51 QUESTION. 1

Which of the following is normally cooled by the Reactor Plant Component Cooling

Water system on the Recirculation Pump shaft seal packages? ,

l

The reactor coolant leaking from the Recirculation System into the lower seal  ;

a.

1

cavity via the breakdown bushmg. l

l

b. The reactor coolant flow directed to the Drywell Equipment Drain Sump from

the seal package.

!

c. The Control Rod Drive Hydraulic System seal purge flow being injected into

l

i the Recirculation Pump impeller cavity.

d. The Control Rod Drive Hydraulic System seal purge flow being directed to

the Drywell Equipment Drain sump.

l

!

1

! ,

'

I

I

_-. - - - _ _ - .-- -.

52 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 85% power

- The At-The-Controls Operator has just depressed the " Transfer To LFMG"

pushbuttons for transferring the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed

- The Operator reports that the CB5A breaker opened but the CB5B breaker did

NOT open

Which of the following describes the expected status of the Recirculation Pumps 20

seconds after this failure?

a. Both Recire Pumps will be coasting to a stop

b. The "A" Recirc Pump will be running in " slow" speed, the "B" Recirc Pump

will be running in " fast" speed.

c. The "A" Recire Pump will be running in " slow" speed, the "B" Recire Pump

will be coasting to a stop.

d. The "A" Recirc Pump will be coasting to a stop, the "B" Recire Pump will be

running in " fast" speed.

53 QUESTION: I

Which of the following describes how the design and operation of the two backup scram

valves results in venting the scram air header?

a. Normally energized, one valve will deenergize with each RPS channel to vent l

l

the scram air header.

b. One valve is powered from each RPS trip channel with either valve energizing

to vent the scram air header.

c. Both RPS channels must trip to deenergize either valve with both valves

required to vent the scram air header.

d. Both RPS channels must trip to energize either valve with only one valve

required to vent the scram air header.

. _ . - _- _ _ __ _ _ _ _ . .

$ )

l

54 QUESTION:

SELECT the method by which reactivity insertion rate is regulated for control rod

withdrawals and insertions.

Reactivity insertion rate is controlled by:

'

a. automatically varying the position of the Control Rod Drive Hydraulic

Pressure Control Valve.

"

b. throttling the water flow entering and leaving the under-piston area of the

drive mechanism. j

c. automatically varying the operating position of the Control Rod Drive

Hydraulic Flow Control Valve. i

I

'

d. throttling the water flow entering and leaving the over-piston area of the drive

i

mechanism.

55 QUESTION

One of the concerns with maintaining proper reactor water level in the steam separators

during plant operation is to minimize "carryunder".

Which of the following would result if excessive "carryunder" were occurring?

a. Core thermal power would decrease. ,

b. Core differential pressure would decrease. l

1

c. Overall plant efficiency would increase.

d. Jet pump net positive suction head would increase.

.-- . -..__ . -. - . - ... - . - - . - .- - - - .-

56 QUESTION

Given the following conditions:

. The plant is shutdown for refueling

- The "A" Residual Heat Removal (RHR) loop is being placed in the Fuel Pool

Cooling Assist mode on the containment (upper) pools

Which of the following prevents draining the upper containment pools to the suppression

pool via the RHR Minimum Flow To Suppression Pool Valve (F064A) when starting the

"A" RHR Pump?

a. The RHR pump will trip if a flowpath to the upper pools is not established

within 8 seconds.

b. F064 A is overridden closed by the operator during the start of the RHR pump.

c. The operator must establish flow to the upper poo!s before the F064A valve

automatically opens.

d. The F064A valve is isolated and tagged closed during the Fuel Pool Cooling

Assist lineup.

57 QUESTION:

A loss of power has just occurred to one of the solenoids for an Main Steam Isolation

Valve (MSIV).

Which of the following describes the response of the MSIV and the reason for that

response?

The MSIV will:

a. close because the solenoids energize to align the air supply to open the MSIV.

b. remain open because the other solenoid continues to supply air to the MSIV.  !

!

c. close because the solenoids are in series and either one deenergizing will vent

the air supply to the MSIV.

d. remain open because the instrument air accumulator for that MSIV continues

!

to supply air to the actuator.

!

!

58 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 100% power

- Feedwater level control is in " automatic" with Narrow Range Level "A"

selected

- The "A" Narrow Range channel has just failed "DOWNSCALE"

- No operator actions are taken

SELECT the cause of the subsequent reactor scram.

a. Reactor vessel high water level

b. Main Steam isolation Valve closure

c. Reactor vessel low water level

d. APRM high thermal power

59 QUESTION:

Following a normal reactor scram, at what point must the At-The-Controls Operator be

alert for narrow range reactor water level indication " outgassing" or " notching"?

(Assume the Reference Leg Backfill system is NOT in service.)

a. If the cooldown rates exceed the Technical Specification limits.

b. If the MSIVs close and pressure control is on the Safety Relief Valves.

c. When the last Feed Pump is removed from service.

d. As reactor pressure decreases below 450 psig.

- - . -- ,- . .- - . - -- . - .. - - . - - - - ._- .

60 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is shutdown for refueling ,

- The inclined Fuel Transfer System (IFTS) cart has just been loaded with two

fuel bundles and is .still in the upper fuel transfer pool

- A steadily decreasing water level is occurring in the refueling cavity i

Which of the following describes what should be done with the fuel on the IFTS cart in ,

order to place it in a safe position?

a. The cart should be left where it is with a source of makeup water supplied to

the transfer tube within 30 minutes.

b. The cart should be sent to the lower fuel transfer pool.

t

c. Open the IFTS Flapper Valve such that makeup water to the upper fuel

transfer pool will be supplied to the cart. l

d. The fuel should be removed and placed in the upper fuel pool storage racks.

l

l

l

l

a

!

1

- -

... -_~ - . . _ _ - - . . . .. - ..

61 QUESTION:

'

Given the following conditions:

- The plant had been operating at 100% power for several days

- A combination of problems has resulted in the loss of ALL high pressure feed

capabilities with the exception of the Reactor Core Isolation Cooling (RCIC)

system which automatically initiated

- It has been 2 minutes since the reactor scrammed

- Pressure control is on the main turbine bypass valves

Which of the following describes the proper response of RCIC for these conditions?  ;

RCIC is running with a discharge pressure of: l

a. 1010 psig, pump flow of 600 gpm and reactor water level is decreasing.

b. 1030 psig, pump flow of 400 gpm and reactor water level is rising.

!

c. 940 psig, pump flow of 120 gpm and the Minimum Flow To Suppression Pool

valve (F019)is open.

d. 1200 psig, turbine speed of 4250 rpm and the Minimum Flow To Suppression

Pool valve (F019)is open.

l

l

I

I

l

l

_ - . -. _ _ _ _ . . _ ,

l

l

!

62 (JUESTION:

l

Given the following conditions:

- The Main Control Room has been evacuated due to a fire

- All immediate actions were attempted prior to leaving the Main Control Room

however the shutdown status of the reactor could not be determined prior to

evacuation

l

- Control of the plant has been established at the Remote Shutdown Panel

Which of the following must the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) use to make the

decision to enter EOP-1 A,"RPV Control - ATWS" for these conditions?

The decision will be based upon:

a. the Reactor Building Operator's report on the status of the Scram Inlet and

Outlet Valves on the HCUs.

b. monitoring reactor water level trend versus the number and type ofinjection

systems operating.

c. the rate at which Suppression Pool temperature rises due to Safety Relief ,

Valve cycling.

d. an estimate of reactor power from the number of Safety Relief Valves cycling

versus time after the scram.

1

l

\

l

l

!

1

. - . . -. -. . _. -. -. -- . _ _- -

l

i

i

63 QUESTION: f

i

Given the fbliowing conditions: ,

!

- The plant had been operating at 75% power

- A loss of feedwater occurred

! - The Main Steam Isolation Valves closed on a level spike below -143 inches -

- Reactor water level decreased to -50 inches and is now +30 inches  :

- All expected automatic actions occurred

l

Upon resetting the scram, the At-The-Controls Operator received all eight (8) RPS Scram ,

SOV lights, however, the Scram Discharge Volume (SDV) Vent and Drain Valves do .

NOT indicate "open". 7

i

SEl.ECT the reason for the SDV Vent and Drain valves remaining closed. ,

a. The SDV high water level scram signal is still present.

,

b. The Alternate Rod Insertion Valves are still open. l

c. The Reactor Mode Switch is still in " Shutdown"  ;

d. The EOP-0005, Enclosure 12 (Defeating RPS & ARI Logic Trips) switches j

are still in " Emergency". ,

1

l

1

i

!

l

1

l

. _ _ ._ _ . . __ _

64 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 30% power l

- Suppression pool cooling is in service

- The surveillance test for manual operation of the Safety Relief Valves (SRV)is

in progress

- During the surveillance, suppression pool temperature reached 103 F

Which of the following are the requirements concerning entry into/ implementation of

EOP-2," Primary Containment Control"?

a. The SRV surveillance procedures allow 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> to reduce suppression pool

temperature below 100 F before EOP-2 entry is required.

a. EOP-2 may be deferred for 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> while suppression pool temperature is

reduced to less than 100 F.

c. Technical Specifications modify the Emergency Operating Procedure limit to

105 F while surveillance testing to the suppression pool is occurring.

l

I

d. The actions of EOP-2 are required to be performed as soon as suppression

pool temperature is above 100 'F.

1

i

i

65 QUESTION:

Injecting boron before exceeding the Boron Injection Initiation Temperature (BIIT) will i

ensure that the suppression pool temperature will not:

a. exceed 160'F.

b. exceed the Heat Capacity Temperature Limit (HCTL).

t

! c. reach the point of adversely affecting low pressure ECCS pump net positive

suction head.

l

d. be heated to the point that drywell pressure increases solely due to high

suppression pool temperatures.

I

l

,

. _ _ . - . . . _ _ .

l

!

66 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

l

!

'

- The plant is operating at 100% power

- Offgas Building area radiation levels are rising

- Offgas Building and Main Plant Vent Stack effluent radiation levels are rising

- Offgas hydrogen concentration is 5%

- Actions are being directed to reduce hydrogen concentration in Offgas to less

than 4%

Which of the following is the reason why the operator is NOT allowed to place the

standby recombiner in service to reduce hydrogen concentrations to less than 4%?

Placing the standby Offgas recombiner in service: l

!

a. may exceed the capacity of the preheater reducing temperatures to the level

l

where recombination will stop,

b. could reduce the flow rate when the service air purge is initiated.

.

l

c. may cause a loss of main condenser vacuum resciting in an MSIV closure if

the plant is still at power.

d. could provide the ignition source for the hydrogen already present.

f

l

l

t

c

J

4

67 QUESTION:

,

Given the following conditions:

- The plant had been operating at 100% power j

- A loss of off-site power with diesels failing to start (Station Blackout) has l

occurred .

- All automatic actions have occurred and all immediate operator actions have  ;

been taken l

l

Which of the following is the concern with long term operation of the Reactor Core j

isolation Cooling (RCIC) system under these conditions?

!

I

RCIC operation during a station blackout will be limited:

a. by the system isolation on equipment space high temperatures.

b. by the cooling water being supplied to the RCIC lube oil cooler.

c. by turbine exhaust backpressure as the suppression pool reaches saturation

conditions.

d. by the automatic isolation on low steam supply pressure as the reactor

depressurizes.

i

__ . . . . _ _ _ . . _ ._ . . _ _ . _ _ . .._ _ . _ _ _ - . _ _ . __ _ _ _ . . . ._

,

'

i

l

68 l

QUESTION:

Given the following conditions: l

I

- A reactor scram with Main Steam isolation Valve (MSIV) closure from 90%

power has occurred

- ADS air is not available to the Safety Relief Valves (SRV)  :

- EOP-1. "IU)V Control" requires maintaining the cooldown rate less l

than 100 F/hr l

- The EOP directs depressurization by " sustained" SRV opening

Which of the following is the direction the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) should l

provide to the Unit Operator regarding " sustained" SRV opening? j

l

l

The SRVs should be:

a. opened and maintained open until the reactor is depressurized or until air

pressure is no longer available.

b. opened and maintained open to obtain pressure reductions equivalent to 100

  • F before shutting.

c. opened to obtain a rapid pressure reduction to 450 psig and then placed in

" Automatic".

d. opened to obtain pressure reductions in increments of 100 psig until the

reactor is depressurized.

1

69 QUESTION:

The bases for the Maximum Core Uncovery Time Limit curve:

a. is the time limitation for a reactor water level indication response once all

injection is stopped and adequate core cooling is assured.

b. is the time the core may be partially covered and steam cooling ensures the

hottest fuel rod temperature will not exceed 1800*F.

c. is the time reactor level may be below the bottom of active fuel with no

cooling and the hottest fuel rod clad temperature not exceeding 1500 F

d. provides time limitations on the operator to complete RPV flooding prior to

exiting this procedure and entering EOP-4, " Primary Containment Flooding"

70 QUESTION:

Assuming the affected control rods are not physically stuck, which of the following

Alternate Control Rod Insertion methods will be most effective for rod insertion without

regard to the cause of a failure to scram (ATWS)?

a. Deenergize the scram solenoids

b. Vent the scram air header

c. Vent the CRD overpiston volume

d. Reset the scram and initiate a manual scram

- ... . - -- . - = - - . - . - . . - - - - - . . _ . . - _ _ _ -

.

i

!

71 QUESTION:

The plant is performing an Emergency Depressurization from normal operating pressure.

Only three (3) Safety Relief Valves (SRV) can be opened.

1

I

Which of the following restrictions / limitations control the opening of the Main Steam

lsolation Valves (MSIV) to assist in the depressurization?

l

The MSIVs:

a. should not be opened if the Tech Spec cooldown rate limits will be exceeded.

b. should not be opened if the cause of the isolation was high steam line

radiation levels.

,

c. may be opened irrespective of any suspected fuel failure or steam line brenk.

!

d. may be opened only if the differential pressure across the valves can be

! reduced to less than 50 psid.

l

r

i

I

l

!

i

l

,

4

72 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant had been operating at 100% power

- The "A" lleater Drain Pump has tripped and the "B" Heater Drain Pump is

NOT available

- Reactor power is slowly increasing

SELECT the power reduction REQUIRED for these conditions.

Power should be reduced to:

a. 70%.

b. 75%.

c. 80%.

d. 90%.

73 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- A loss of coolant accident has occurred

- All plant systems have responded as designed

- Conditions are such tic'. Emergency Containment Venting is required by EOP-

2," Primary Containment Control"

Which of the following systems is REQUIRED to be available to perform this venting?

a. Annulus Pressure Control

b. Drywell/ Containment Purge Supply

c. Hydrogen Mixing

d. flydrogen Purge

74 GllESTION:

SEl.ECT the reason why terminating and preventing injection during a failure-to-scram

( ATWS) transient results in a power reduction.

Tenninating and preventing injection:

a. results in increased core inlet subcooling as feed preheating is decreased.

b. increases the void fraction by a reduction in core natural circulation flow,

c. increases water temperature as level is decreased.

d. results in an increase in fuel temperatures as core steaming rate increases.

75 QlJESTION:

During a loss of coolant accident, containment pressure reached 35 psig.

Which of the following describes the concern with a containment pressure of this

magnitude?

a. The containment " burst" pressure was exceeded.

I

b. The Safety Relief Valves cannot be opened at this pressure.

c. The containment venting capability is not available,

i

d. Suppression pool / containment water level indication is no longer reliable.

l

s

I

6

76 QUESTION:

Which of the following is a consequence of allowing suppression pool water level to

decrease below 13 feet?

Suppression pool water level less than 13 feet:

a. uncovers the Reactor Core isolation Cooling turbine exhaust line.

b. reduces the available net positive suction head for the low pressure ECCS

pumps below minimum required.

c. uncovers the top two horizontal vents.

d. could result in overpressurization of the Containment.

77 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- A reactor startup is in progress

- The At-The-Controls Operator is withdrawing control rods approaching

criticality

- A "SRM Short Period" alarm is received during control rod withdrawal.

What are the REQUIRED actions for these conditions?

The At-The-Controls Operator should immediately:

a. stop control rod withdrawal and allow the period to stabilize.

b. insert a reactor scram if reactor period is less than 30 seconds.

c. request direction from the Reactor Engineer / Control Room Supervisor,

d. insert the control rod fully and notify the Control Room Supervisor.

_ . . . _ . . _ . . _ _ . . _ .. ._ _. .

,

78 QUESTION:

i

Given the following conditions:

The plant has had a failure-to-scram (ATWS) and has deliberately lowered

water level ,

'

- Reactor water level is -100 inches

- Reactor pressure is 385 psig

'

- Suppression pool water levelis 19 feet 9 inches

- The Control Room Supervisor has just directed the operators to commence and

slowly inject with the systems listed in EOP-4 A,"ATWS - Level / Power ,

Control"

Which one of the EOP-4A listed systems must have interlocks defeated prior to use as an

i injection system?

!

!

a. Low Pressure Coolant injection

b. Reactor Core isolation Cooling

c. High Pressure Core Spray

d. Condensate /Feedwater

!

)

,

l

,

1

1

__

)

!

79 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is shutdown with refueling operations in progress

- The water level in the refueling cavity is decreasing due to a leak

Which of the following describes the level indicator used and the conditions under which

the Main Control Room will see this level decrease?

The refueling cavity level decrease will: l

a. be seen immediately on the Wide Range level indication (recorder and meter).

b. indicate on the Narrow Range (recorder and meter) as soon as level reaches

the top of the main steam lines.

c. be seen immediately on tuc dpset Range level' indication (recorder).

d. indicate on the Shutdown Range (meter) before level reaches the reactor

vessel flange.

!

l

. - . _ - . . . . - . .- . . . _ . - ... - . . . _ _ . __ _ . . _-

,

.I

l

l

80 QUESTION: 1

1

i Given the following conditions:

l

- A plant startup is in progress with the Reactor Mode Switch in "Startup/ Hot l

Standby" i

'

g

- The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves have just been opened and steam

line warming is in progress

'

- Main condenser vacuum has been established

- A loss of the "A" RPS Bus hasjust occurred

flow will this bus loss affect the plant assuming it has NOT been restored as directed by

AOP-0010," Loss Of One RPS Bus"?

a. The Outboard Main Steam Isolation Valves will begin to drift close.

b. Main condenser vacuum will begin to decrease.

c. The Recirculation Pumps will automatically trip.

d. The Scram Discharge Volume will begin filling.

l

l

l

)

i

I

.

l

l

I

l

l

. ..._. .

,

81 QUESTION:

Following a transient, the Containment Ventilation system is aligned and operating as

follows:

- The "A" and "B" Unit Coolers are running, the "C" Unit Cooler is off

- The Containment Chilled Water Supply and Return Containment Isolation

Valves are closed

- The Standby Service Water supply valves to the "A" and "B" unit coolers are

closed

Which of the following describes what has occurred?

a. Drywell pressure has been 3.0 psig for 6 minutes. l

b. A loss of offsite power has occurred and all three diesel engines started 3

I

minutes ago.

c. Reactor water level has decreased to -60 inches.

'

d. Containment to annulus D/P decreased to -14" WG (vacuum in the

containment) i

l

82 QUESTION:

Gisen the following conditions:

- The Main Control Room has been evacuated due to toxic gas

f

- ALL immediate actions were accomplished prior to leaving

- The Reactor Core Isolation Cooling (RCIC) was operating for reactor water

level control

- The RCIC turbine coasted to a stop  ;

i

I

Which of the following describes what occurred to the RCIC system and the system's

current status?

The RCIC:

a. system has isolated and is no longer available for reactor water level control

from the RSP.

b. turbine tripped, can be locally reset and then restarted from the RSP.

c. system has isolated and may be restored once the isolation signal is reset from

the RSP.

d. turbine tripped, can be both reset and restarted from the RSP.

I

l

I

- .

l

l

83 QUESTION:

While operating in EOP-3," Radioactive Release Control", the operator is directed to

restart Turbine Building Ventilation ifit is shutdown.

Which of the following describes how this will affect the Turbine Building and the

release that is occurring?

Restarting Turbine Building Ventilation will:

a. ensure all building air will be filtered prior to release to the environment.

b. assure overall radioactive releases will be monitored.

c. maintain a positive pressure inside the building.

d. improve building equipment continued operability.

84 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- Prior to the transient the plant had been at 100% power

- A reactor scram and Recirculation Pump automatic transfer to " slow" speed

occurred

Which of the following conditions DIRECTLY caused the scram AND Recirculation

Pump transfer?

a. Reactor vessel pressure i127 psig

b. Main Turbine Stop Valve closure

c. High drywell pressure

d. Reactor vessel water level (Level 4)

l

l

!

_ - _

l

85 QUESTION:

j

SELECT the reactor vessel water level indicator that provides the most accurate level

indication to determine if main steam line flooding is occurrine dunng a severe  !

overfeeding transient?

a. Narrow range

b. Wide range

c. Upset range

d. Shutdown range

i

80 QUESTION:

Which of the following conditions will result in a Control Rod Drive (CRD) mechanism

high temperature?

a. Two CRD Stabilizing Valves fail closed.

b. '.oss of power to the CRD Pressure Control Valve.

c. Lo.:s of air to the inservice CRD Flow Control Valve,

d. The ooling/ exhaust header pressure equalizing valves fail closed.

l

,

i

87 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 75% power

- The Steam Sea'. Evaporator has just been lost

- There is NC . le estimate for retum of the evaporator

SELECT the appropriate operator actions for the above conditions.

a. Reduce turbine load as necessary to maintain the self-sealing steam supply to

the turbine glands.

b. Transfer the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed and maintain power within

bypass valve capacity.

c. Reduce power as required to prevent condenser vacuum from decreasing to

less than 25 in Hg.

1

d. Transfer the Recirculation Pumps to " slow" speed and then trip the main

turbine.

.

!

l

,

1

l

!

88 QUESTION: i

Given the following conditions:

The plant has just had a loss of shutdown cooling

- Actions were taken to raise water level to +75 inches as indicated on the

SilUTDOWN Range Level Instrument

- No other means of forced circulation is immediately available

What will be the concern if water level subsequently decreases BELOW +75 inches?

l

Lowering water level:

a. may adversely affect the validity of the reactor coolant temperature

indications.

b. will reduce the required net positive suction head for restarting shutdown

cooling.

c. reduces the margin to the low water level shutdown cooling isolation setpomt.

d. reduces the amount of relatively cool water available to control the reactor

temperature increase.

l

l

l

l

i

1

- - . - - -- _ . ..

'

i

l

89 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

i

i

- A reactor and plant startup is in progress with power at 2%

- RPV pressure is 800 psig

- The Reactor Mode Switch is in "Startup/flot Standby"

- The "A" CRD Pump has just tripped

- The "B" CRD Pump is being lined up for a start  !

- Scram accumulator 32-41 trouble alarm is in and has been verified to be from

low pressure (indicating 1500 psig)

Which of the following will the Control Room Supervisor (CRS) use to make the

determination on declaring control rod 32-41 " Slow" or " Inoperable"? (Note: No other

accumulator trouble alarms are in.)

The determination is based upon:

a. the control rods' last scram time surveillance results.

b. the time charging water header pressure will be less than 1520 psig.

c. the number of control rods fully withdrawn.

l

d. drive water pressure availability to fully insert the control rod.

1

l

s

!

'

90 QUESTION:

On a total loss of Normal Service Water (NSW) which of the following conditions

REQUIRE a manual reactor scram?

a. Service water temperatures are greater than 90 F and only one NSW Pump

can be started.

b. The Standby Service Water system did not start and align itself to the NSW

system correctly.

c. The reactor is critical at 175 F, just below the point of adding heat, with

power ascension in progress.

d. The plant is performing a stanup and is just making preparations to roll the

main turbine.

91 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- The plant is operating at 75% power

- A loss ofinstrument air has occurred

- Air pressure has reached 67 psig and is steady

- No control rods have drifted

- All immediate actions have been taken

- The At-The-Controls Operator depresses the Feedwater Regulating Valve reset

pushbuttons

What will be the expected result for this action?

Reactor water level will:

a. rapidly increase.

b. rapidly decrease.

c. remain at the current level.

.

)

l

d. return to the Master Level Controller setpoint.

l

1

l

l

_ _ . - _ _. - , . = .

t

-

92 QUESTION:

3

Given the following conditions:

- The plant was operating with both Recirculation Pumps in " Slow" speed

- The "A" Recirculation Pump has tripped

- Nuclear instrumentation indicates NO power oscillations are occurring

- The plant is operating in Region "B" of the Power / Flow Map

SELECT the action REQUIRED to exit Region "B" i

l

a. Insert control rods using the Shutdown Control Rod Sequence Package. l

b. Restart the "A" Recirculation Pump in " Slow" speed.

I

c. Transfer the "B" Recirculation Pump to " Fast" speed.

d. Reduce flow in the "B" Recirculation loop.

i

3

93 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions: 1

- The plant was operating at 75% power

- A Group VI(MSIV) and Group Vll(RWCU) isolation occurred

Which of the following signals could have caused these isolation?

a. Low reactor vessel water level (Level 2)

b. High drywell pressure

c. RWCU equipment area high temperature

d. Main steam line tunnel high temperature

\

94 QUESTION:

l

Given the following conditions:

- Drywell temperature and pressure are increasing due to a leak

- Drywell pressure is 1.82 psig

- All expected automatic actions have occurred

- EOP-2," Primary Containment Control", was entered for high drywell

temperature and Enclosure 20 for restoration of drywell cooling is in progress

,

Once the interlocks have been defeated, which of the following will be providing cooling

to the drywell?

a. Drywell cooler fans and normal service water.

b. Drywell cooler fans and chilled water.

l

c. Drywell cooler fans and standby service water. )

d. Drywell cooler fans ONLY.

95 QUESTION:

SELECT the MINIMUM conditions assuring adequate core cooling exists while

performing Primary Containment Flooding per EOP-4.

Containment water levelis:

a. 65 feet with the RPV at 51 psig.

b. above the Maximum Containment Water Level Limit with the containment l

vented.

c. 65 feet with the RPV vented,

d. above the Maximum Containment Water Level Limit with the containment at

25 psig.

,

96 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

1

- The plant is operating in EOP-2, " Primary Containment Control" for high

suppression pool level, j

Which of the following is the concern with a continued increase in suppression pool level

greater than 21 feet?

a. Suppression pool temperature indications will not be reliable.

b. ECCS pump suction line pressure and loading limitations may be exceeded. l

c. Safety relief valve operation may result in direct pressuri7ation of primary

containment.

d. The unsafe region of the Heat Capacity Level Limit (IICLL) curve will be

i

entered

I

,

!

.

_ _ .

,

1

I

I

97 QUESTION:

i

Given the following cor:ditons:

- The plant is shutdoem

- The reactor vessel head is installed

i

- No core alterations are platined

<

,

- A loss of all nonnal shutdown cooling has occurred.

Which of the following is an APPROVED alternate method of decay heat removal for the

,

above conditions?

a. Filling the main steam lines with the condensate pumps and discharging to the

suppression pool via the Safety Relief Valves (SRV). The suppression pool is

cooled by RHR.

"  ;

. b. Gravity draining reactor coolant through the RHR heat exchangers to the

suppression pool. The cooled water will be retumed to the vessel by LPCS. j

c. Circulating reactor coolant from the RPV to the main condenser via the

MSIVs and MSL drains. The cooled water will be retumed to the vessel by the

.

!

condensate system. l

l

<

d. Start one reactor recirculation pump and place RHR in the Fuel Pool Cooling

i Assist Mode.

!

!

.,

. . . . - - - _ - - .

I

i

98 QUESTION

Uiven the following conditions:

i - A loss of coolant accident is in progress

An Auxiliary Building entry into the HPCS Pump room is needed

- Radiation levels in that area do NOT allow personnel access

Which of the following describe the radiation levels in the HPCS Pump room area?

HPCS Pump room radiation levels are:

a. above the maximum normal operating value

b. above the maximum safe operating value.

c. greater than the level necessitating a Site Area Emergency.

- d. greater than the levels required for an Emergency Depressurization.

99 QUESTION:

,

Given the following conditions:

, - The plant was operating at 55% power

- A high drywell pressure condition has occurred due to a leak

.

- All expected automatic actions have occurred

l

Which of the following will be the MAXIMUM expected annulus pressure for these ,

conditions? l

a. -0.75 inches W.G.

b. -0.50 inches W.G.

c. -0.25 inches W.G.

d. 0.00 inches W.G.

l

l

I

,

j

l

100 QUESTION:

Given the following conditions:

- A failure to scram has occurred

- Power is 20% with control rods being inserted normally

- EOP-3," Secondary Containment Control" has been entered due to IIVAC

cooler high differential temperatures caused by a fire in the Auxiliary Building

- The Main Steam Isolation Valves have closed

- Reactor water level control is via Condensate /Feedwater

Which of the following systems should be isolated ifit is discharging into the Auxiliary

Building?

I

,

a. Control Rod Drive l{ydraulics 1

i

b. Reactor Water Cleanup )

i

c. Fire suppression systems

1

d. Feedwater.

!

!

!

!

l

i

l

i